Multi-Functional Display
Version: 3.00.340
Functional Description
Date of Issue: February 2016
Copyright: © Transas MIP Ltd 1991–2016. All rights reserved.
The information contained herein is proprietary to Transas MIP Ltd and shall not be duplicated in whole or in
part. The technical details contained in this manual are accurate at the date of issue but are subject to change
without notice.
Transas MIP Ltd pursues a policy of continuous development. This may mean that the product delivered has
additional enhancements not yet covered by the latest version of this manual.
The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective
owners.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Printing House Conventions
List of Documents
Preamble
Data Required for Handling This Description
Definition and Abbreviations
Definitions
Abbreviations
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts
Chart Formats
Manual Correction
Plotting and Editing of Updating Objects
Search for Updating Objects
Categories of Updating Objects
Updating Object Attributes
Maps
Maps Display
Creating and Editing of Maps
Search for the Map Objects
Categories of Map Objects
Attributes of Map Objects
Chart Orientation
Info
General Chart Information
Information on Chart Objects
Chart Control
Layers Control
Autoload
Chart Autoloading
Manual Chart Loading
Autoscale
Automatic Scaling
Manual Setting of Scale
Autoscroll
Zoom
3
12
12
13
14
14
14
17
21
22
22
22
23
23
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
29
30
30
30
34
34
36
36
37
38
38
38
39
39
4
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Chart Formats Priority
Colour Palettes
Multiloading
Chapter 2. Information Sensors
Navigational Sensors
Positioning
Processing of Data Received from EPFS
Processing of Data Received from ER Positioning System
Processing of Data Received from EP Positioning System
Processing of Data Received from DR Positioning System
RMS Calculations for Different Positioning Systems
RMS Calculations in the Navigation Positioning Systems (PS)
40
41
42
43
44
44
44
44
44
45
45
45
RMS Calculations in the Method of Ship Referencing to the Radar Picture (ER)
46
RMS Calculations in Dead Reckoning Sailing Mode (DR)
46
Heading
STW
COG/SOG
Positioning System
DLOG
STW and Drift
Echo Reference
Depth
Time
Display of Navigational (Essential) Information
No Input, No Data or Corrupted Checksum Situation
Data Has Not Passed Validity or Plausibility Check
Consistent Common Reference System
General
Referencing to Same Place
Referencing to Same Time
Compensation for Latency
Compensations for Navigational Data
Position Offset
Magnetic Compass
Gyro
Draught
Navigational Sensors Selection
Manual Selection
Selection of Position Source
47
47
48
48
48
48
49
50
50
50
52
53
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
56
56
58
58
58
58
Selection of Heading Source
60
Selection of STW Source
61
Selection of SOG Source
62
Selection of Depth Source
63
Automatic Source Selection with Actuation of Fallback Functionality
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
63
Table of Contents •
5
Sensor Failure
63
Differential Mode Lost
64
Automatic Restoration Function
64
Other Sensors
Wind Interface
Drift
Temperature
VDR Output
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools
ECDIS Task Cursors
Free Cursor
Graphic Cursor
RADAR Task Cursors
Free Cursor
General
Change of the Free Cursor Appearance as it Hits the Target
Switching Free Cursor Type on Targets
Free Cursor with Different Display Presentation
Graphics Cursor
Multi-Units Support
Own Ship Motion Data
Own Ship Motion Parameters
Own Ship Motion Vectors
Ship Symbol on the Electronic Charts
Standard Presentation
User Ship Contour
Split Screen
Display of Chart Information on the ECDIS Task Screen
AutoZoom Mode
Ahead Functionality
EBL/VRM
Relative and True Motion Modes
Man Overboard (MOB) Mode
General Information
Displayed Parameters
Additional Control
Manually Fixed Position
General Information
Input of Source Data
Line of Position Referencing
Display of Calculated Ship Position
Colour Indication of Measurement Numbers
Chapter 4. Alert Management
Display of Alerts
65
65
67
68
69
71
72
72
75
76
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
80
80
80
82
82
82
83
83
84
85
85
86
86
86
86
87
87
87
88
89
93
94
95
96
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
6
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Alerts Acknowledgement
Indications
Display of Indications
Display of Important Indications
Notifications
Guidance for Adjustments of the Limits for Alerts
Main Alerts Generation Principles
Safety Alerts
Navigational Alerts
Route Alerts
Target/Radar Alerts
Sensors Alarms
Hardware Alerts
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules
Route Planning
Route Elements
Route File Format
Route Generation
Route Editing
Schedule Calculations
Schedule Generation and Editing
Schedule Calculations Taking into Account the Effect of Currents
Check of the Schedule
Route Checking
Dangers Taken into Account During the Route Check
Quick Dangers Review
Editing of a Previously Created Route
Work with Multiroutes
SAR Routes
Route Monitoring
Sailing Along the Route
Obtaining of Information on the Voyage Schedule
Chapter 6. Logging Functions
General
Ship Logbook
Ship Logbook Formation Principles
Making Corrections and Safety
General
Editing Event Parameters
Entering Comments
Archiving Ship Logbook
Electronic System Logbook
Electronic System Logbook Formation Principles
Contents of the Electronic Ship Log
Display of Electronic Ship Logbook in Data Tool Utility
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
99
100
100
101
103
104
106
106
112
114
115
117
119
121
122
122
124
125
126
126
126
128
128
129
129
129
130
131
132
135
135
137
139
140
143
143
147
147
148
150
152
153
153
154
156
Table of Contents •
Own Ship Track
Display of the Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task
Track Elements
Display of Own Ship Track in Data Tool Utility
Target Data
Archiving of Target Tracks in the MFD
File Handling in Data Tool Utility
Radar Overlay
Archiving of Radar Picture in MFD
File Handling in Data Tool Utility
Log Book, Route Screen Shots Printout
Graphic Screen Copy
Printing Out of Information
Chapter 7. Navigation Databases
Tides and Tidal Currents
Information on Tides
Information on Tidal Currents
Surface Currents
Ports
NAVTEX Messages
General
NAVTEX Messages Database
NAVTEX Messages Viewing and Editing
Position Display on an Electronic Chart
Chapter 8. Radar Task
Video Signal Processing Principles
Factors Affecting Radar Operation Quality
General
Equipment Installation Factors Affecting Radar Functioning Quality
Environmental Factors Affecting Radar Functioning Quality
Receiver’s Own Noise
7
157
157
158
158
158
158
159
159
159
159
160
160
160
161
162
162
164
165
166
167
167
168
169
171
173
175
175
175
175
176
176
Sea Clutter
177
Precipitation Clutter
177
Clutter Caused by Multi-Beam Radio Signal Propagation (Second Time Echo)
178
False Spots Caused by Multiple Echo
179
Interference from Other Radars
179
Antenna Sidelobe Clutter
180
Radar’s Own Signal (Main Bang)
180
Clutter Suppression Facilities
General
Processing of Radar Signals in MFD
Gain
Rain
Sea
180
180
181
181
182
184
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
8
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Joint Action of Sea and Rain Controls
Interference Rejection
Accumulation
Enhanced Video Mode
Recommendations on Adjusting Quality Radar Image
Radar Features
Radar Transceiver Modes
Standby
Run
On-PPI Image Formation Principle
Brightness and Contrast Setting Rules for Radar Picture
Display Brightness Adjustment
Overlay Colour
Radar Transceiver Adjustment
Short/Medium/Long Pulse
Turning and Responses
Stabilisation Modes
Own Ship Presentation Modes
North Up
Course Up
Head Up
Own Ship Motion Modes
Relative Motion
Relative Motion – Unstabilized
184
186
186
187
189
191
191
191
191
192
193
195
195
196
196
196
197
198
198
198
198
198
198
198
Relative Motion – Sea Stabilised
198
Relative Motion – Ground Stabilised
198
True Motion
True Motion – Sea Stabilised
True Motion – Ground Stabilised
MFD Operation Modes Availability Table
Range Scales and Range Rings
Radar Adjustment in the Absence of Targets
Radar Reflectors and Beacons
Operation for SART Detection
General
Radar Range Scale
SART Range Errors
Radar Bandwidth
Radar Ghost Echoes
Detuning the Radar
Gain
Anti-clutter Sea Control
Anti-clutter Rain Control
Radar Trails
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
198
198
199
199
200
201
201
202
202
202
203
203
203
203
203
203
203
204
Table of Contents •
9
Mode Characteristics
Trail Display Control
Mode Use Limitations
Parallel Index Lines
Variable Range Marker (VRM)
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)
Radar Picture Referencing
Performance Monitor
25/30 kW Scanner
10 kW Scanner
Control of Efficiency of Radar Transmission System
204
207
207
207
207
207
207
209
209
209
210
Control of Efficiency of Radar Reception System
210
Mute (Blank) Sectors
Radar Maps
Radar Maps Display
Conditions of Displaying Radar Maps
Combining Radar Overlay
Purpose of the Mode
Mode Operation
Recommendations on the Use of the Mode
Mode Operation Limitations
RADAR User Configurations
Indications in RADAR Task
Display of ARPA Targets
Targets Tracking Limitations
Collision Avoidance
ARPA Targets Acquisition and Drop from Tracking
Display and Naming of ARPA Targets
Dangerous ARPA Targets
Vectors of ARPA Targets
Selected Target
Guard Zones
Past Position
Lost Targets
Trial Manoeuvre
Curved Heading Line
Carry Mode
Drop Mode
CHL Auto Pilot Mode
Simulator Targets
Display of AIS Targets
General Information
Naming of AIS Targets
AIS Target Symbol Types, Orientation
211
212
212
212
212
212
213
214
214
215
216
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
221
222
222
223
224
228
228
229
229
230
230
230
233
233
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
10
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Activated and Non-Activated AIS Targets
Dangerous AIS Targets
AIS Target in Guard Zone
Lost AIS Targets
Selected Target
Own Ship Data
Trial Manoeuvre for AIS Targets
Associating AIS and ARPA Targets
Turning AIS Functionality OFF
DR Mode of AIS Targets
Display of Chart Information on RADAR Task
Chart Loading
Chart Autoloading
Manual Chart Loading
Information about Charts and Chart Objects
General Chart Information
Information on Chart Objects
Effect of Errors on Chart Information Display Accuracy
Chart Layers Control
Chart Object Display
Conditions of Displaying Electronic Charts
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task
Radar Overlay
ARPA
Display and Naming of ARPA Targets
Dangerous ARPA Targets
Vectors of ARPA Targets
Guard Zones
Lost Targets
AIS
AIS Transponder Interface
Display of AIS Targets
Naming of AIS Targets
AIS Target Symbol Types, Orientation
Activated and Non-Activated AIS Targets
Dangerous AIS Targets
AIS Target in Guard Zone
Lost AIS Targets
Associating AIS and ARPA Targets
DR Mode of AIS Targets
Obtaining Information on AIS Targets
Target Table
Chapter 10. Network Configuration
Network Configuration
General
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
235
236
236
236
237
238
238
239
239
240
240
240
240
241
241
241
242
243
245
246
246
249
250
251
253
253
254
254
254
255
255
256
258
258
260
261
261
262
263
264
264
265
267
268
268
Table of Contents •
Interswitch
Navigational Data Management
Data Synchronization
ECDIS Master and Slave
Integrated Task Control and Monitoring
Annex A. Additional Information
Hot Keys
Annex B. System’s Single Point Failure Tolerance
Dual Network System Configuration
Single Network System Configuration
System Diagnostics
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses
FMEA Table
Annex D. Alerts List
Alerts List
11
269
270
271
271
272
275
276
279
280
284
286
289
290
301
302
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
12
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Printing House Conventions
Sample of notation
Usage comments
Setup.exe
Messages, commands, files, folders and other Windows OS
info
<Enter>
Keyboard key names
Button
Buttons
Interface
Names of windows, pages, panels
Menu
Menu items
Ahead
User interface elements and the ECDIS task objects
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS User
Manual
Names and sections of documents
Note, Warning, Caution
Note, Warning, Caution
Auxiliary text
Auxiliary text
Cross reference
Cross reference
http://www.amver.com
URL
Table 1. Printing House Conventions
List of Documents
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS User Manual.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). RADAR User Manual .
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Functional Description.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Additional Functions.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS Quick Reference.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). RADAR Quick Reference.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Utilities.
Navi-Sailor 4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.348). Special Functions.
Navi-Planner 4000 (v. 3.00.346). User Manual.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Preamble
Preamble provides general information on the work with document.
Data Required for Handling This Description
Definition and Abbreviations
Definitions
Abbreviations
14
14
14
17
14
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Data Required for Handling This Description
The aim of this book is to give the user some idea of the operating principles and algorithms of MFD.
Definition and Abbreviations
Definitions
Activated AIS target
Target activated for the display of additional graphically presented information.
Appropriate portfolio of up to date paper charts (APC)
A suite of paper charts of a scale to show sufficient detail of topography, depths, navigational hazards, aids to
navigation, charted routes, and routeing measures to provide the mariner with information on the overall
navigational environment.
CIE Colour Calibration
Colour calibration at the monitor performed to transform the CIE-specified colours for ECDIS into the colour
coordinate system of the screen
Common Reference System
Means provided to assure that when navigational information from sensors and other information sources is
displayed together with charted information, it is referenced to a consistent common reference point (CCRP).
Compilation Scale
The scale at which the data was compiled.
Corrupted Data
ENC data produced according to the IHO S-57 ENC product specification, but altered or modified during
production, transmission, or retrieval.
Dangerous Target
Tracked radar or reported AIS target with a predicted CPA and TCPA that violates values preset by the user.
The respective target is marked by a “dangerous target” symbol.
Dead-Reckoned Position (DR)
Position extrapolated from the last accepted position update, based on present course and speed, and
updated on a time interval selected by the operator.
Degrade
Reduce the quantity or quality of information content.
Display Base
The chart content as listed in Annex A and which cannot be removed from the display. It is not intended to be
sufficient for safe navigation.
Display Redraw Time
Interval from when the display starts to change until the new display is complete.
Display Regeneration Time
Interval from operator action until the consequent redraw is complete.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Preamble • Definition and Abbreviations
15
Display Scale
Ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the ground, normalized and expressed as, for
example, 1:10 000.
Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)
Navigation information system which with adequate backup arrangements can be accepted as complying
with the up-to-date chart required by regulation V/19 and V/27 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention, as amended,
by displaying selected information from a system electronic navigational chart (SENC) with positional
information from navigation sensors to assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring, and if
required display additional navigation related information.
Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC)
The database, standardized as to content, structure and format, issued for use with ECDIS by or on the
authority of a Government authorized Hydrographic Office or other relevant government institution, and
conform to IHO standards.
ENC Cell
The basic unit of ENC data covering a defined geographical area bounded by two meridians and two parallels
ENC Data
Data conforming Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC)
ENC Test Data Set
Standardized data set and testing instructions available as IHO S-64.
Estimated position (EP)
Position extrapolated from the last accepted position update, based on present course and speed (STW),
including effects of wind, tide, current, and updated on a time interval selected by the operator.
Fix
Position of own ship determined, without reference to any former position, by the common intersection of
two or more LOPs.
Important Indication
Indication that is displayed visually and continuously, which needs special attention and cannot be removed
from the display other than by eliminating the cause of the indication.
Indication
Display of regular information and conditions, not part of alert management.
Line of Position (LOP)
Plotted line on which own ship is located determined by observation or measurement of the range or bearing
to an aid to navigation or other charted element.
Lost Target
Tracked radar or reported AIS target for which the system is no longer receiving valid position data.
Non-ENC Data
Data not conforming to ENC data.
Official
By, or on authority of a government, authorized Hydrographic Office or other relevant government
institution.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
16
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Overscale
Display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the compilation scale.
Readily Available Indication
Indication that can be, at any moment, immediately displayed by a single operator action.
Presentation Library
Implementation of the display specifications in IHO S-52, Annex A, by de-coding and symbolizing the SENC.
Raster Chart Display System (RCDS)
A navigation information system displaying RNCs with positional information from navigation sensors to
assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring and, if required, display additional navigationrelated information.3.1.31
Raster Navigational Chart (RNC)
A facsimile of a paper chart originated by, or distributed on the authority of, a government-authorized
Hydrographic Office.
RTS
Reported Target Simulator as defined in Annex F of IEC.
Route
Series of waypoints connected by one or more legs including both straight and curved segments.
RNC Data
Data Conforming to Raster Chart Display System (RCDS).
RNC Test Data Set
Standardized data set and testing instructions available as IHO S-64.
Single Operator Action
Procedure achieved by no more than one hard-key or soft-key action, excluding any necessary cursor
movements, or voice actuation using programmed codes.
Safety Contour
Borderline between safe and unsafe water based on depth defined by the mariner.
Safety Depth
Depth defined by the mariner, e.g. the ships draught plus under keel clearance, to be used by ECDIS to
emphasise sounding on the display equal to or less than this value.
Selected Target
Target selected manually or automatically for the display of detailed alphanumeric data, information and text
in a separate user dialogue area. The target is represented by a “selected target” symbol.
Sleeping AIS Target
AIS target indicating the presence of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. The target is represented
by a “sleeping target” symbol indicating the vessel’s orientation. No additional information is presented until
the AIS target is activated.
Standard Display
The display mode intended to be used as a minimum during route planning and route monitoring.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Preamble • Definition and Abbreviations
17
System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC)
A database in the manufacturer’s internal ECDIS format, resulting from the lossless transformation of the
entire ENC contents and updates.
System Raster Navigational Chart (SRNC)
A database resulting from the transformation of the RNC by the RCDS to include updates to the RNC by
appropriate means.
Abbreviations
l
AIS – Automatic Identification System;
l
ARCS – Admiralty Raster Chart System;
l
ARPA – Automatic Radar Plotting Aid;
l
BAM – Bridge Alert Management;
l
BNWAS – Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System;
l
BWOL – Bearing to Wheel Over Line;
l
CCRP – Consistent Common Reference Point;
l
CIE – International Commission on Illumination;
l
CMG – Course Made Good;
l
COG – Course Over Ground;
l
CPA – Closest Point of Approach;
l
DGPS – Differential Global Positioning System;
l
DIS – Draught Information System;
l
DR – Dead Reckoning;
l
DWOL – Distance to Wheel Over Line;
l
EBL – Electronic bearing line;
l
ECDIS – Electronic Chart Display and Information System;
l
EML – Expected Motion Line;
l
ENC – Electronic Navigational Chart;
l
EP – Estimated Position;
l
EPFS – Electronic Position-Fixing System;
l
ER – Echo Reference;
l
ERBL – Electronic Range and Bearing Line;
l
ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival;
l
ETD – Estimated Time of Departure;
l
GC – Great Circle;
l
GMT – Greenwich Mean Time;
l
GPS – Global Positioning System;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
18
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
GZ – Guard Zone;
l
HCRF – Hydrographic Chart Raster Format
l
HDG – Heading;
l
HO – Hydrographic Office;
l
IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission;
l
IHO – International Hydrographic Organization;
l
IMO – International Maritime Organisation;
l
INFO – Information;
l
m – metre;
l
min – minute;
l
MMSI – Maritime Mobile Service Identities;
l
MSI – Maritime Safety Information;
l
MOB – Man Overboard;
l
NAVTEX – Navigational Telex;
l
NM – Nautical Mile;
l
NMEA – National Marine Electronics Association;
l
NS – Navi-Sailor;
l
PS – Positioning System;
l
PTA – Planning Time of Arrival;
l
RCDS – Raster Chart Display System;
l
RIB – Radar Integrated Board;
l
RL – Rhumb Line;
l
RMS – Route Mean Square (error);
l
RNC – Raster Navigational Chart;
l
ROT – Rate Of Turn;
l
RPM – Revolution Per Minute;
l
SENC – System Electronic Navigational Chart;
l
SOLAS – Safety of Life at Sea;
l
SAR – Search And Rescue;
l
sec – second;
l
SMG – Speed Made Good;
l
SOG – Speed Over Ground;
l
STG – Speed To Go;
l
TCPA – Time to Closest Point of Approach;
l
TTG – Time To Go;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Preamble • Definition and Abbreviations
l
UTC – Universal Time Coordinated;
l
VDR – Voyage Data Recorder;
l
VRM – Variable Range Marker;
l
WGS-84 – World Geodetic Datum;
l
WOL – Wheel Over Line;
l
WPT – Way Point;
l
WS – Work Station;
l
XTD – Cross Track Distance.
19
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1.
Electronic Navigational Charts
This chapter provides a description of principles underlying data display on the
electronic navigational charts.
Chart Formats
Manual Correction
Plotting and Editing of Updating Objects
Search for Updating Objects
Categories of Updating Objects
Updating Object Attributes
Maps
Maps Display
Categories of Map Objects
Attributes of Map Objects
Chart Orientation
Info
General Chart Information
Information on Chart Objects
Chart Control
Layers Control
Autoload
Autoscale
Autoscroll
Zoom
Chart Formats Priority
Colour Palettes
Multiloading
22
22
22
23
23
24
25
25
27
27
29
30
30
30
34
34
36
38
39
39
40
41
42
22
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Chart Formats
Raster and vector forms of data presentation have their benefits and disadvantages. The advantage of the
raster form is the easiness of data production reduced to the organization of source paper chart scanning
and presentation of raster data in compliance with specifications. The greatest drawback of raster data
is the impossibility to activate signals and alarms in the shipboard display system as the ship is crossing
a distinctive depth contour or the boundary of a dangerous area. Also noted is the impossibility to change
the display scale, distortion of presentation if the scanner and screen resolution differ, which makes the chart
considerably less easy to handle.
Unlike the raster charts, which are called “mute”, vector charts are “intelligent”. Indeed, they allow the safety
of navigation to be considerably improved owing to the signal and alarm generation capability. They carry
significantly more information, as for any element of navigational situation, the navigator can obtain
exhaustive information, which is contained in the vector data in the form of object attribute values. It is only
natural that the production of vector data should take much more time and cost.
In the RADAR task, vector format charts only are used.
Manual Correction
Where the automatically performed electronic updating is unavailable or insufficient, there should be a
facility for making it manually. This is what Manual Correction function has been designed for, it is controlled
from Manual Correction panel of the ECDIS task.
Plotting and Editing of Updating Objects
The use of the manual updating function implies the creation of a separate chart information layer (updating
layer). This layer is transparent and contains updating objects only, which when displayed is superimposed
on the principal chart information. It is possible to plot updating objects contained in the provided library,
enabling the check of attributes related to them in the process. Updating objects can be edited. Symbols of
updating objects differ from information and official corrections of electronic navigational charts, and do not
affect the presentation on the ECDIS task screen.
All the information on such layer objects is contained in a single file inaccessible for editing and referred to
“manual updating” file, which is synchronised on all the workstations via the network.
For the plotting of temporary and preliminary updating, determining of the object (display) effective time is
enabled. These terms are defined as “Temporary updating” object attribute.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Manual Correction
23
Search for Updating Objects
Manual Correction panel is intended for a fast search for updating objects.
The table shows the created updating objects and their attributes. An object is selected from the left-hand
part of the page; as this is done, the right-hand part displays its coordinates if this is a point type object, or
coordinates of all the object points if this is a line type object. A double click on the line containing the object
name displays it in the centre of the Chart panel. The found object is highlighted with a flashing circle.
Categories of Updating Objects
Updating file may contain the following object categories:
l
Symbols: conventional signs of nautical charts from the symbol library;
l
Circles: various circle line and area provided types;
l
Lines: lines and areas from the provided types;
l
Text: names and comments made by the operator in a special field;
l
Depths: digits entered by the operator and specifying depth in metres.
To create or edit an object, use row of buttons on Manual Correction panel where you can select the object
category.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
24
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Updating Object Attributes
Each of objects can be assigned its own attribute. The following object attributes can be assigned, corrected
or deleted:
l
l
l
“Attached file”: file of a certain format supported by Windows XP (*.txt, *.rtf, *.bmp,*.doc, *gif,
*.jpg, *.tif, *.pdf). The list of files which can be attached to the object, is provided in a special
window with Attachments function in use. The data base with such files is generated by using the Data
Tool utility:
“Object colour” is selected by the operator from the provided colour palette. This attribute is not
available for the “symbols” object category as the library presents type coloured objects;
“Object information”: the text of information is entered by the operator in Info field of attributes window.
The entered data is used for the display in Chart Information window if button on the Control Panel is
pressed. Information related to this object will be displayed in the top part of the message panel;
l
l
l
l
l
l
“Text” is used for the display in combination with an object as its name, property, etc.;
“Danger”: when this checkbox is checked, the updating object will be considered by the ECDIS task as a
danger to navigation (isolated or area type) with relevant parameters;
“Object depth” is assigned by the operator for specifying depth over the object which will be taken into
account as a safety criterion in the ECDIS task;
“Temporary updating” is used for the display of updating in the specified period of time. Time limits are
set in the checkboxes and relevant windows where Start is the object display start time, and End is
deleting time. If the latter setting is not made, the object which has temporary updating attribute is not
deleted;
“Deleted object”: object status, which is assigned when the object is deleted. Object data is saved in the
updating file.
Not each of the updating object categories may have all the attributes. The table below clearly illustrates
the possibility of assigning attributes to various categories of such objects. The possibility to assign a
certain attribute is marked with an X.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Maps
Symbol
Line
Text
Depth
Circles
Attached file
X
X
X
X
X
Colour
–
X
X
X
X
Info
X
X
X
X
X
Text
X
X
–
X
X
Danger
X
X
X
X
X
Depth
X
X
X
–
X
Start/Cancel
X
X
X
X
X
Deleted
X
X
X
X
X
25
Where an attribute cannot be assigned to any object category, this function is disabled, and the
corresponding field is greyed.
Updating objects with the following attributes can be highlighted with colour by using the relevant buttons
on the Display option page:
l
Objects with “attached file” (Attachments);
l
“Deleted objects” (Deleted);
l
“Object colour” (Colored); in this case, the capability to display objects in the assigned colour is disabled,
and all the objects (except those already selected: objects with attached files, temporary updating and
deleted objects) are displayed in orange colour.
Maps
To create and display information not connected with the official chart and updating data, the ECDIS task has
a capability to compile a separate object layer, which is referred to as maps. The use of this functionality is
recommended for the storage of cartography related notes and service information.
Maps Display
The map is displayed if loaded and if its display is enabled. On the ECDIS task screen it is shown as a transparent
layer with map objects plotted onto it. This layer is superimposed on top of the principal chart information.
When several maps are loaded simultaneously, the map selected by the user from the list of loaded maps is
active, i.e., information on this chart objects is available on the Find Object page.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
26
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Creating and Editing of Maps
Creating of maps is performed by using dedicated ECDIS task graphic editor, which is controlled from Maps
panel.
For the map editing, they should first be loaded by using Load button.
The chart name is shown on the button after the chart has been loaded.
Maps can be created by using the following methods:
l
l
Creating of a map with new objects: first the objects are plotted, then the chart is saved by using Save
function;
Creating a chart by merging several maps: this is done automatically by using the Merge function: the
chart resulting from the maps merging can be saved under the name of one of the merged maps, or
under a new name by using the Save function.
The saved user information is stored in separate files with *.ai extension. Such files contain a set of objects
with the following characteristics determined by the user:
l
Symbol number from the symbol library;
l
Coordinates;
l
Object attributes.
Search for the Map Objects
Find object page is intended for a fast search for objects plotted on the map.
The table shows the created map objects and their attributes. An object is selected from the left-hand part of
the page; as this is done, the right-hand part displays its coordinates if this is a point type object, or
coordinates of all the object points if this is a line type object. A double click on the line containing the object
name displays it in the centre of the Chart panel. The found object is highlighted with a flashing circle.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Maps
27
Categories of Map Objects
Maps can contain the following object categories:
l
Symbols: conventional signs of nautical charts from the symbol library;
l
Lines: lines and areas from the provided types;
l
Text: names and comments made by the operator in a special field;
l
Depths: digits entered by the operator and specifying depth in metres;
l
Shapes: lines and areas from the provided types (Ellipse, Rectangle, Sector, Polygon and Circle).
To create or edit an object, use an area on Maps panel where you can select the object category and type,
and the assigned attributes.
Attributes of Map Objects
Each of objects can be assigned its own attribute. The following map object attributes to can be assigned,
corrected or deleted:
l
“Attached file”: file of a certain format supported by Windows XP OS (*.txt, *.rtf, *.bmp, *.doc,
*.gif, *.jpg, *.tif, *.pdf). The list of files, which can be attached to the object is provided in a
special window with Attachments function in use. The database with such files is generated by using the
Data Tool utility:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
28
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
“Object colour” is selected by the operator from the provided colour palette;
l
“Object information”: the text of information is entered by the operator in Info field of attributes window.
The entered data is used for the display in Chart Information window by pressing
button on the
Control Panel. Information related to this object will be displayed in the top part of the message panel;
l
l
l
l
l
“Text” is used for the display in combination with the object as its name, property, etc.;
“Danger”: when this checkbox is checked, the map object will be considered by the ECDIS task as a danger
to navigation (isolated or area type) with relevant parameters;
“Object depth” is assigned by the operator for specifying depth over the object which will be taken into
account as a safety criterion in the ECDIS task;
"Temporary” is used for the display in the specified period of time. Time limits are set in the checkboxes
and relevant windows where Start is the object display start time, and End is deleting time.;
“Deleted object”: object status, which is assigned when the object is deleted. Object data is saved in the
map file.
Not each of the object categories may have all the attributes. The table below clearly illustrates the possibility
of assigning attributes to various categories of objects.
The possibility to assign a certain attribute is marked with an X.
Symbol
Lines
Text
Depth
Shapes
Attached file
X
X
X
X
X
Colour
X
X
X
X
X
Info
X
X
X
X
X
Text
X
X
–
X
X
Depth
X
X
X
–
X
Start/Cancel
X
X
X
X
X
Deleted
X
X
X
X
X
Objects with the following attributes can be highlighted with colour by using relevant buttons on the Display
options page:
l
Objects with “attached file” (Attachments);
l
“Deleted objects” (Deleted);
l
l
“Object colour” (Colored); in this case, the capability to display objects in the assigned colour is disabled,
and all the map objects are displayed in the orange colour;
"Temporary" (Timed objects).
Object selection by their attributes is made for all the loaded maps.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Chart Orientation
29
Chart Orientation
During the work with charts in the ECDIS task, the user can select any suitable chart orientation. Direction to
the north is shown with symbol:
Charts on the Chart panel may have the following orientation:
l
North Up direction:
l
Head Up direction (by the current heading direction):
l
Course Up direction (used with the loaded route only):
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
30
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Info
General Chart Information
For the prompt obtaining of general information on the vector chart whose boundaries the cursor is
currently located, the ECDIS task implements Info function. For S-57 format charts, information on the
edition number and date, coordinate offset, the latest correction date and source of editions (country) is
displayed.
For TX-97 format charts, information on the edition number and date, coordinate offset, the latest correction
date is displayed along with data on the source of the paper which the vector electronic chart was made from.
Information on Chart Objects
A large number of chart objects on small screen area do not allow the display of all their associated
information. With the use of Info function, a free cursor for performing “acquisition” function appears in the
chart area. A press on the left trackball/mouse button in the bottom part of the screen opens up Info panel,
which displays available information on the “acquired” objects both in text and graphic form.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Info
31
Objects are “acquired” by using the following procedures:
l
l
l
l
l
Point type object (lighthouse, buoy, “i” information sign, etc.) – position the marker so that the object is
within its box;
Line or area (recommended route, cables, oil pipelines, traffic separation lines, areas, etc.) – position the
marker on any line segment;
Displayed chart – position the marker on any chart space free of chart objects;
Any of the charts whose boundaries are shown within the chart area – position the marker so that one of
the chart corners is under the marker;
NAVTEX message symbol – position the marker so that the symbol is within the marker box.
Information panel displays a list of acquired objects. To view the data, selected the required object from the
list.
It is also possible to obtain information on updating and map objects. Text information on such objects is
provided if they have “Object information” attribute. For the user to be aware that is available, objects can
be supplemented with “Info”
and “Caution”
symbols from the symbols library.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
32
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
With the use of S-57 format charts, point type objects are marked with a circle if Highlight function is selected
on Info panel. To cancel the marking, press Unmark button.
With the use of S-57 format charts, information on objects can contain a text description which is displayed in
a special window after the selection of Textual Description function in Info panel. Part of the chart which the
text refers to, is marked with hatching.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Info
33
With the use of S-57 format charts, the navigator is sometimes in need of receiving promptly some important
information about lights avoiding a long way to the full information. For this purpose the following feature is
implemented: when the navigator positions the free View cursor on an object (light, buoy, beacon) a hint with
info will appear (see also Chapter 3, section ECDIS Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor).
The following information is specified in the hint window for objects encoded together with lights:
l
NAME – lighthouse name;
l
LIGHT – characteristic;
l
Horn, Racon – additional information which can include characteristics of the Radar Transponder beacon,
Fog Signal, Signal Station;
l
BRG – bearing to the light (not specified unless the light is within the visibility range from the own ship);
l
DIST – distance to the light (not specified unless the light is within the visibility range from the own ship).
Should several lights turn up under the cursor, they will all be shown in the hint.
Information on a light in the sector can also be obtained by positioning the free View cursor on this sector.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
34
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Chart Control
Layers Control
In compliance with requirements of IEC 61174 ECDIS and S-52 standards, the ECDIS task implements a
capability to select the display of various chart information categories:
l
Base display includes classes of information whose display must not be turned off in any circumstances
whatsoever;
l
Standard display includes classes of information essential for the navigation and route planning modes (it
is possible to select the display of difference chart information classes included in this display, in this case
the important indication is displayed in the Control panel, see also Chapter 4, section Indications,
paragraph Display of Important Indications);
l
Custom display includes classes of other information, which was not included in the previous two categories
(it is also possible to select the display of difference chart information classes included in this display).
The display of individual classes is controlled from Layers page of Charts panel.
According to the IEC 61174 standard the following information, has to be displayed during planning of a route
and monitoring of a route:
l
Display Base to be permanently shown on the ECDIS display, consisting of:
o
Coastline (high water);
o
Own ship's safety contour;
o
Isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within
o
Safe waters defined by the safety contour;
o
Isolated dangers above water which lie within the safe water defined by the safety
o
Contour such as fixed structures, overhead wires, etc;
o
Scale, range and north arrow;
o
Units of depth and height;
o
Display mode.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Chart Control
l
l
35
Standard Display, consisting of:
o
Display base;
o
Drying line;
o
Buoys, beacons, other aids to navigation and fixed structures;
o
Boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.;
o
Visual and radar conspicuous features;
o
Prohibited and restricted areas;
o
Chart scale boundaries;
o
Indication of cautionary notes;
o
Ship’s routing systems and ferry routes;
o
Archipelagic sea lanes.
All other information, to be displayed individually on demand, for example:
o
Spot soundings;
o
Submarine cables and pipelines;
o
Details of all isolated dangers;
o
Details of aids to navigation;
o
Contents of cautionary notes;
o
ENC edition date;
o
Most recent chart update number;
o
Magnetic variation;
o
Graticule;
o
Place names.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
36
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Autoload
For a clear presentation of the sailing area and work with the chart information, it is necessary to correctly
select the navigational charts and their scale. This kind of selection can be made automatically by the user set
parameters, and manually. It is for this purpose, as well as for the clear display of chart information on
electronic charts of different formats, that Charts panel has been made.
Chart loading is understood as the display of an electronic chart from the ship folio on the ECDIS task screen.
Such loaded chart, whose number is specified in the control on the Control Panel, is referred to as the current
chart.
For an easy search and loading of the required charts, the ECDIS task offers two procedures: automatic and
manual.
Chart Autoloading
Chart autoloading is a special ECDIS task function, which allows the automatic display of the chart optimum
in regard of its position and scale, and defines this chart as the current chart.
To turn this function on, press ON button in Chart autoload buttons row:
Chart autoloading is made in the following cases:
l
l
Under the ship position – when the ship sails beyond the current chart boundaries;
Under the cursor – when the graphic cursor moves beyond the screen limits during the use of some
functions (Review, ERBL, Zoom, WPT Editor, etc.).
Where it is necessary to use the chart which is not loaded automatically, a special function is provided which
is activated by pressing FIX button in Chart autoload toolbar. As this is done, the chart autoloading is disabled
and required chart can be loaded manually. After the ship symbol has passed the boundaries of the fixed
current chart, the autoloading mode will be turned on automatically.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Chart Control
37
Manual Chart Loading
The manual method of chart loading requires the operator to select the charts him/herself in one of the two
windows adapted for the search of charts. The selection can be made from the list of the entire ship folio
(Complete list page) and from the list of charts covering the ship position (By position page). Apart from
differences in the lists, the functionality of these windows is identical.
The manual method of chart loading requires the operator to select the charts him/herself in one of the two
windows adapted for the search of charts.
For a fast search of charts by the number or part of this number, there is a window for the input of the
number and Find button for the activation of the search process. In this case, the required chart (or the one
whose number is similar in the initial characters) is displayed and highlighted in the list. If the first character of
the entered number matches no first characters in the numbers of charts in the provided folio, no chart is
highlighted, whilst the bottom part of the window displays the “No chart found” message.
Another search method consists in the selection of a chart from the list; to make the search easier, this list
can be sorted in the ascending/descending order of the following chart characteristics:
l
Chart Number – chart number;
l
Scale – chart scale;
l
Last upd. – date of the most recent chart updating in dd-mm-yyyy format;
l
Updated to – the media, which was used for the latest updating of TX-97 or SENC chart collection;
l
Format – chart format.
The “hot” chart loading method consists in the work with the Chart Area window of the Control Panel by the
selection-from-the-list principle.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
38
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Autoscale
Each chart has its original scale. To set the required scale and support the scale uniformity in case of the chart
multi-loading, the scaling function is provided. This function has manual and automatic setting modes. The
scale set on the ECDIS task screen is displayed in the left-hand part of the screen in the digital and graphic
form (scale bar).
Automatic Scaling
The automatic scaling enables the display of a chart loaded in the autoload mode on its original scale.
It should be noted, that is it possible to change the scale manually in the automatic scaling mode. To do this,
select the number from 1 to 5 values in Scale Ratio combo box (General page of Charts panel), which will result
in that with a switch to another chart, the scale will be increased/decreased by as compared to the original
current chart scale (“0” setting).
If negative values are selected, the scale of the chart in the Autoload mode will be increased, and the other
way round. Autoloading of charts on the original scale is performed with Scale ratio value set to 0:
With the automatic chart scaling OFF, charts are loaded on the current screen scale.
Manual Setting of Scale
The chart display scale can be set by using <ZOOM IN> and <ZOOM OUT> keys on keyboard ES6 or
and
buttons on the Chart panel. As this is done, the current chart scale alters by one fixed scale value. To set the
original chart scale on the ECDIS task screen, use
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
button on the Chart panel.
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Chart Control
39
Autoscroll
The possibility to view charts in the area far away from the own ship position symbol is implemented in
Review function. It turns on the graphic cursor moved around the ECDIS task screen with the
mouse/trackball. As the cursor goes beyond the screen boundaries, and with the chart autoloading ON, the
current and/or adjacent charts will be re-drawn around the central point determined by the cursor
coordinates. Data on the coordinates and the cursor position relative to the ship is displayed in a special
window.
Zoom
The possibility to display the necessary chart fragment or sailing area, is implemented by Zoom function.
With Zoom function ON, the operator selects the required sailing area on the Chart panel keeping the left
mouse button depressed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
40
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
After the left trackball/mouse button is pressed, the ECDIS task automatically set the scale to such fixed scale
value which will enable the selected sailing area to be fully displayed on the Chart panel. At the same time,
the chart will be loaded on the scale closest to the fixed scale value set in the ECDIS task.
Chart Formats Priority
The ECDIS task implements a mode for the priority loading of different format charts. This mode is enabled in
General page of Charts panel.
With the checked None checkbox, the standard ECDIS task operating mode is set, whereby all the charts from
the collection in any format are equally suitable for use. In this case, if there are several charts on the same
scale, priority is given to the TX-97 (TRX) format charts.
With the checked ENC checkbox, and with optimum charts in different formats available under the ship
position, it is the ENC format chart which will be loaded.
With the checked DNC checkbox, and with optimum charts in different formats available under the ship
position, it is the DNC format chart which will be loaded.
For ARCS chart format checking HCRF checkbox enables this mode.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 1. Electronic Navigational Charts • Colour Palettes
41
Some characteristics of ARCS chart presentation do not meet the standards and ECDIS requirements which
TRANSAS works to comply with; this is why some additional limitation are introduced in the ECDIS task for
the use of ARCS format charts:
l
l
l
In the navigation mode (monitoring of the ship position on the chart) it is always ARCS chart which is
selected as the main one, and which is displayed on the original scale. The main chart is understood as
the chart, which the ship position is superimposed on. The original scale’s numeric value may generally
differ for the paper chart scale on the proportion determined by the particular display resolution and
calculated by the ECDIS task;
When the direct monitoring of the ship position is not performed, the ECDIS task functions are somewhat
expanded:
o
The charts are selected both, from the ARCS folio and from the chart of other formats if their scale is
more suitable;
o
The display scale can be changed by the user; it should be noted that the scale cannot be increased
more than twice;
o
If it is necessary to join charts using different projections, the projection of the viewed charts can be
transformed to Mercator.
If the main chart projection is not Mercator, it is generally impossible to use the electronic chart
mutilating. In other cases, the additional loading is possible for ARCS format charts with scale equal to the
main chart scale, as well as for chart of other formats.
Colour Palettes
For an easier perception of the information shown on the ECDIS task screen, the ECDIS task implements a
capability to select colour palettes to suit the external illumination conditions:
Palette group is intended for the selection of the screen colour palette depending on the environmental
illumination:
l
Daylight;
l
Dusk – night with moon shining;
l
Night – moonless night;
l
Night inverted – moonless night (the text is shown in the other colour).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
42
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Multiloading
For covering areas adjacent to the current chart with chart information, chart multiloading is used. This function
requires the chart autoload to be ON, and allows the remaining chart area to be filled with the most detailed
charts on the scale set for the current chart. Up to 6 charts of different formats can be simultaneously displayed
on the screen:
When the ECDIS task screen cannot be fully covered by the selected chart on the necessary scale, the
remaining part is filled with information from other charts loaded on the same scale:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2.
Information Sensors
This chapter provides a description of principles underlying the MFD process and
display of information from external sensors.
Navigational Sensors
Positioning
Heading
STW
COG/SOG
Depth
Time
Display of Navigational (Essential) Information
Consistent Common Reference System
Compensations for Navigational Data
Navigational Sensors Selection
Other Sensors
Wind Interface
Drift
Temperature
VDR Output
44
44
47
47
48
50
50
50
54
55
58
65
65
67
68
69
44
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Navigational Sensors
Positioning
Processing of Data Received from EPFS
In this mode, the following systems can be used for the ship positioning:
l
GPS (DGPS, PGPS);
l
GLONASS;
l
GNSS.
Where there are two positioning sources, they are connected in the System Configuration utility as POS1 and
POS2 sensors, appropriate identifiers assigned to them. The MFD provides for two positioning systems:
Primary and Secondary whose accuracy ensures navigational safety. In case of the Primary Positioning
System failure, the Secondary Positioning System is automatically switched to for the reception of data.
The ship position coordinates can be received from the system sensors in the form of IEC 61162-1 standard
messages (DTM, GGA, GLL and RMC). In this case, Latitude and Longitude fields are processed (N/S and E/W
hemisphere specified as appropriate).
Processing of Data Received from ER Positioning System
This method is based on the reception of ARPA information on the bearing and range to some stationary
object (e.g. a lighthouse) with fixed coordinates. With this method in use, the ship position is determined by
referencing to the ship position to the radar image of such target. This method allows continuous positioning
for both primary and secondary methods.
When the ship position is determined by ER method, the selected radar target is set in the coordinates
specified by the operator. Then, proceeding from the data on the selected target (bearing and distance), the
ship position is calculated relative to the coordinates of the target. Therefore, as long as the data on the
target is supplied continuously, the positioning will also be continuous.
As all the navigational calculations are made by the ECDIS relative to the ship position on the Primary track,
with the ER mode turned on the primary ship positioning method, all the targets received from the ARPA are
plotted on the chart relative to the ship position, i.e. are shifted by the value of the entered ship position
correction.
Processing of Data Received from EP Positioning System
The Estimated Position (EP) mode is implemented on the bases of dead reckoning (DR) and takes into
account additional data on currents or the last received drift value. You can select one of the following
estimation modes:
l
l
l
“EP: Drift” – to use the last calculated drift value for correcting the position;
“EP: Current” – to use total current (tidal and surface) from the navigational databases for correcting the
position;
“EP: Manual” – to use manually entered drift for correcting the position. The variation range in direction is
0–359.9 degrees, and 0.0–9.9 knots in speed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
45
The name of the mode in use will be displayed in Primary or Secondary windows on the Control Panel.
EP positioning system it autonomous and is available if there is data from the compass and water-speed log.
With the failure of one or more units, the positioning system is considered to be faulty.
COG\SOG\HDG\LOG window on the Control Panel displaying the own ship motion parameters, shows heading
and speed values supplied by the compass (“HDG”) and (“LOG”), whereas “CMG” and “SMG” fields contain
respective corrected values.
Processing of Data Received from DR Positioning System
In the Dead reckoning mode, the ship position is determined from the information received from gyro and
log.
Attention! If DR mode is used for a long time, this may result in a serious ship positioning error, therefore, the
ship position should be permanently checked and corrected as required.
Display of Position data see below in Display of Navigational (Essential) Information paragraph.
RMS Calculations for Different Positioning Systems
RMS Calculations in the Navigation Positioning Systems (PS)
1. If there is a GST message. By default, the processing of this sentence is disabled in the NMEA Input Filter
(see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section MFD
Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, and item 6). If this sentence is supplied to the system, the
positioning accuracy is calculated from the following formula:
M=3 * Standard deviation of semi-major axis of error ellipse (field 3 of GST message)
2. If there is no GST message, but there is a GBS message. Values of fields 2 and 3 (expected error in latitude
and Expected error in longitude) in metres are used in the following formula:
3. If there is neither GST message, nor the GBS message:
M=1.73*UERE*HDOP, m
Where:
HDOP – the RMS calculations are only made if the GGA or GNS message is available; if there is no HDOP
data, the RMS is not calculated;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
46
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
UERE – default values are used:
o
GPS SPS – UERE=5.1 m;
o
DGPS SPS – UERE=1.5 m;
o
GPS PPS – UERE=3.3 m;
o
RTK fixed – UERE=1.5 m;
o
RTK float – UERE=1.5 m.
RMS Calculations in the Method of Ship Referencing to the Radar Picture (ER)
Where
is calculated for each of the reference targets from the following formula:
, (nm)
Where:
– distance to the reference target;
– course determining error – set in the System Configuration utility
(1° by default);
– ARPA target bearing determining error (1° by default);
– ARPA target distance determining error depending on the selected Range:
l
Range of less than 1.5 nm – 20 metres;
l
Range of 1.5 nm and more – 1% of the selected Range scale.
The Range value from the RSD message can also be used (fields 10 and 11) for calculations for
ARPA targets received via the NMEA protocol.
The
value changes dynamically with the scale changes.
Where the Range value is unknown, 1% or the 48 nm scale is used for calculations, i.e., 888 metres.
RMS Calculations in Dead Reckoning Sailing Mode (DR)
Calculations are not made unless the Heading and STW data is available.
Where:
– course determining error – set in the System Configuration utility (1°by default);
– speed determining error – set in System Configuration utility (2% by default);
– distance covered after the most recent DR correction input is made, manually or automatically.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
47
Heading
Data on the ship’s true course (HDG) is supplied to the MFD by the gyro in HDT, THS and VHW sentences.
Connection of the gyros is made on Sensors page in the System Configuration utility.
Where there are two heading sources, they are connected in the System Configuration utility as GYRO1 and
GYRO2 sensors, and appropriate identifiers assigned to them. It is possible to connect 2 Gyros.
Also ship’s true course may be outputted to the MFD from magnetic compass with HDG sentence.
Display of heading data see below in Display of Navigational (Essential) Information paragraph.
STW
The following sources can be used in MFD for calculating speed through the water (STW):
l
LOG/DLOG – speed through the water from the connected sensor is used or Doppler log;
l
Manual – speed value entered manually by the operator is used.
Speed data STW is received from the (D)LOG in VHW or VBW sentences. Connection of the (D)LOG is made on
Sensors page in the System Configuration utility.
Where there are two speed sources, they are connected in the System Configuration utility as (D)LOG1, LOG2
sensors, appropriate identifiers assigned to them. It is possible to connect 2 LOG and 1 DLOG.
With the use of a log, or in the case of manual speed input, the numeric speed value and ship gyro course are
used for building up vector of speed through the water.
With the use of a DLOG, building up of a speed-through-water vector takes into account the longitudinal and
transverse components (in ship coordinates) of speed through the water received from the DLOG. The
direction of gyro heading (HDG) and speed-through-water vector (CTW) are generally not coincident. For the
operator information, with the use of DLOG as a speed-through-water sensor, shown simultaneously in the
top left part of the Display Panel are HDG and CTW.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
48
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The top right corner of the PPI shows the STW longitudinal value and the calculated absolute value, slash
separated.
The vector direction (CTW) is determined as a summary value of gyro heading (HDG) and speed vector in the
ship coordinates, the longitudinal and transverse components of speed through the water received from
DLOG taken into account. In the absence or incorrect value of the HDG, the direction of the speed-throughwater vector (CTW) cannot be calculated. The absolute speed-through-water value (STW) is calculated
and displayed. In this case, vector of the own ship speed through the water (CTW/STW) is not displayed on
the ECDIS task screen.
If the single axis water log display can present the speed of the ship in other than the forward direction, the
direction of movement should be indicated unambiguously. Therefore single axis water logs cannot detect
the effect of leeway.
If ships in shallow water, when the accuracy of the dual-axis log may be decreased.
If ships in deep sea area, when the accuracy of the dual-axis log error may be occurred.
Display of STW data see below in Display of Navigational (Essential) Information paragraph.
COG/SOG
The following sources can be used in MFD for calculating speed over the ground (SOG):
l
Positioning System;
l
DLOG;
l
STW + Drift;
l
Echo Reference.
Display of COG/SOG see below in Display of Navigational (Essential) Information paragraph.
Positioning System
Speed over the ground is supplied by the connected position sensor (GPS, DGPS, etc.). Speed vectors are
calculated to take into account the course over the ground (COG), supplied by the appropriate sensor. Speed
data COG/SOG could receive from Positioning system in VTG and RMC sentences.
DLOG
Calculations of the speed vector value take into account the longitudinal and transverse components of
speed over the ground received from DLOG. The vector direction (COG) is determined as a summary value of
gyro heading (HDG) and speed vector in the ship coordinates, the longitudinal and transverse components of
speed over the ground received from DLOG taken into account. Speed data COG/SOG could be received from
the (D)LOG in VBW sentences.
In the absence or incorrect value of the HDG, COG cannot be calculated and none of the modes which use it
are operational.
STW and Drift
Speed through the water takes into account manual drift input. In this case, SMG and CMG values of speedover-ground vector are calculated.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
49
Echo Reference
This method is based on the reception of ARPA information on the bearing and range to some stationary
object (e.g., a lighthouse) with fixed coordinates.
Such stationary objects are used as reference points. It becomes possible to use this mode if at least one
such target is available. In MFD, up to 5 reference points can be used. On the ECDIS task screen, reference
points are marked with the letter “R”. As the reference points are selected, through numbering is used from 1
to 10, then numbering starts anew.
COG/SOG calculations use data on relative motion of targets selected for reference targets, and own ship
motion parameters (HDG and STW). If HDG and/or STW are not available, or their values are incorrect,
reference points are dropped from tracking. When the supply of the correct own ship motion parameters is
resumed, the user should select reference points anew.
Attention! If the DLOG (LOG) has failed, to acquire reference points it is necessary to enter STW manually.
The reference points can only be set on the WS with the Navigation MASTER status. When the Navigation
MASTER rights are passed to another WS, reference points
are cancelled and should be set anew if you are planning to use the ER mode.
Use reference targets have the following limitations:
l
l
l
l
The reference target function is to be used if the own ship's speed cannot be displayed normally due to
trouble such as a speed sensor malfunction. Do not use the reference target function except in
emergencies;
If the speed or course of the own ship is changed or a new reference target is set, the displayed speed
may take 3 minutes or more to reach the specified speed after the speed/course change or the setting.
Even after 3 minutes or more has passed, the speed may differ from the specified speed depending on
the tracking condition;
If a large radar echo such as a land target is set as a reference target, the vectors of the speed and other
tracking targets will not be displayed correctly and may cause an accident;
If a sailing ship is set as a reference target, the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not be
displayed correctly and may cause an accident;
l
If the reference target is lost or the target tracking function is stopped, ER mode will be terminated;
l
The reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
50
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Depth
Data on the depth values under the keel is supplied to the MFD by the echosounder in DBT and DPT
message. Connection of the echo sounder (ECHOSOUNDER ) is made on Sensors page in the System
Configuration utility. The depth value is shown on System Information display in the ECDIS task.
Time
Time data is received in ZDA sentences from the Positioning source (UTC sensor). Connection of the UTC
sensor is made on Sensors page in the System Configuration utility.
Display of time data see below in Display of Navigational (Essential) Information paragraph.
Display of Navigational (Essential) Information
The main navigational information implies the following data:
l
Time;
l
Position;
l
COG;
l
SOG;
l
Heading;
l
Speed (STW).
This data is supplied to the MFD by the relevant sensors and is displayed on the Display Panel and Sensors
panel. Provided below is a table which shows layout of navigational information.
RADAR Task
Display Panel
Sensors panel
On panels to the left of PPI
On POSN, COG/SOG, HDG and STW pages of Sensors
panel
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
51
ECDIS Task
Sensors panel
On Ship Position, Heading, Speed and Echosounder pages of Sensors panel
Control Panel
If the data was not supplied or has not passed appropriate checks, it is displayed in accordance with the
algorithms described below. The following possible cases can be singled out:
l
Data from sensor is not available, or the checksum is incorrect;
l
Data has not passed validity, plausibility checks.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
52
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
No Input, No Data or Corrupted Checksum Situation
Described below, as an example, is the system behaviour in the absence of data on the own ship position:
l
No information is supplied by the sensor, or the sentences have an incorrect checksum (if the sentences
have an incorrect checksum, they are not processed, i.e. they are considered to be absent):
Time
System data/GUI display
RADAR Task
Alert
ECDIS Task
ECDIS Chart
T < 10
Ship symbol and vectors
sec
in ordinary colour
None
T ≥ 10
The sensor name is shown in
The sensor name is shown in orange, The ship symbol freezes in ECDIS -
sec
orange, data is shows as
data is shows as orange coloured “*”
the last calculated data.
Pos.
orange coloured “*” symbols:
symbols:
No motion vector is
no
displayed.
input
The ship symbol turns red
l
Some information is supplied from the sensor, but no data required for the indicator in question is
received (e.g., the necessary fields in a sentence are empty):
Time
System data/GUI display
RADAR Task
Alert
ECDIS Task
ECDIS Chart
T < 10
Ship symbol and vectors
sec
in ordinary colour
None
T ≥ 10
The sensor name is shown in
The sensor name is shown in orange, The ship symbol freezes in ECDIS -
sec
orange, data is shows as
data is shows as orangecoloured “*”
orange coloured “*” symbols:
symbols:
the last calculated data.
Pos.
No motion vector is
no data
displayed.
The ship symbol turns red
With other sensors, the system behaves in much the same way except for the display on the Chart panel.
This also refers to the sensors, which transmit non-essential data, too:
l
Water temperature;
l
Wind direction and speed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
53
Data Has Not Passed Validity or Plausibility Check
Described below, as an example, is the system behaviour for the own ship position data:
l
If validity check is not passed:
System data/GUI display
RADAR Task
Alert
ECDIS Task
ECDIS Chart
Ship symbol and vectors
None
in ordinary colour
Data is shown as orange
Data is shown as orange coloured
coloured symbols:
symbols:
l
The ship symbol turns red
None
If plausibility check is not passed:
System data/GUI display
RADAR Task
Alert
ECDIS Task
ECDIS Chart
Ship symbol and vectors
None
in ordinary colour
Data is shows as orange
Data is shows as orange coloured
The ship symbol turns
coloured “*” symbols:
“*” symbols:
red
None
In the plausibility checks, parameter values should not exceed the following limits:
l
LAT: 84°59.99;
l
LON: 180°00.00;
l
HDG:359.9°;
l
LOG: 99.9 kt;
l
Echo: 9998 m;
l
Wind: 999 m/s;
l
ROT: 999 deg/min.
With other sensors, the system behaves in much the same way except for the display on the Chart panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
54
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Consistent Common Reference System
General
To ensure the supply of non-ambiguous information to MFD components, the MFD uses the so-called
“consistent common reference system", which implies the following:
l
Referencing to same place and time;
l
Compensation for latency.
The validity and plausibility check is carried out at the previous data processing stage. Failure to pass these
checks, triggers off relevant alarms.
The CCRS is ensuring that all parts of the MFD are provided with the same type of data from the same source.
Referencing to Same Place
For a Consistent Common Reference Point (CCRP), the MFD uses the Conning Station which all the spaceoriented information is referenced to (e.g., ship and targets position, ERBL, etc.).
Conning Station position in the ship system of coordinates is determined by the settings made in the System
Configuration utility on Ship Settings page of INS panel:
An example of the ship position coordinates re-calculated after the positioning system antenna shift is
provided below:
;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
55
If the heading is lost, the ship contour is no more displayed on the ECDIS task screen.
Information on the position of antenna units is permanently stored in the computer memory. When it is turned
off, the information is not deleted. Antenna configuration can be saved to an external storage by using the
Backup function (see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section
Commissioning Table Creation and System Configuration Back Up, paragraph MFD Configuration Back Up ).
Information is output relative the Conning Station position.
Referencing to Same Time
Time in the MFD supplied by the GPS. Time from GPS, being more accurate, is considered to be the main one,
and is used for system time synchronising. Each time message (ZDA) is received from GPS (UTC sensor), check
is made of the set 2 sec limit between the time from GPS and system time. If the difference exceeds this limit,
time is equalised with GPS (UTC sensor).
Compensation for Latency
Data latency in the MFD is consistent with the data requirements of the individual parts and their relevant
international standards. The maximum data delay in the MFD does not exceed 1 sec, so no compensation for
latency is performed.
Compensations for Navigational Data
Position Offset
If a constant-value error is identified in the ship positioning from any system, it can be taken into account. To
this end, the MFD implements a function for the correction of ship position coordinates.
The correction to ship position coordinates which is entered in the MFD and has a value other than zero,
produces an appropriate change in the ship symbol position and coordinates shown on the ECDIS task
screen. The fact that such correction is taken into account is indicated by a special symbol: a yellow triangle.
RADAR Task
ECDIS Task
The correction entered for the ship position coordinates, regardless of the input method, has a constant
value. With a change of the correction value, its input operation is required to be repeated.
Input of a position offset is made for every sensor on the of the Navigation MASTER task’s in the RADAR task
on POSN page of Sensors panel and in the ECDIS task on Ship Position page of Sensors panel by using the
following procedures:
l
l
Manual input of correction. Corrections defined in the form of a numeric increment to the ship position
coordinates are entered in Position offset field with appropriate N/S and E/W characters;
Input of correction by the cursor position. In this method, corrections are calculated automatically as a
difference between the coordinates specified by the cursor and produced by the positioning system.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
56
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
RADAR Task
ECDIS Task
The calculated correction is used for correcting coordinates received from the positioning system.
To stop the effect of the correction, press Cancel button, whereupon the ship position will be determined
exclusively by the coordinates received from the positioning sensor.
Magnetic Compass
With the use of a magnetic compass, heading data is supplied in the HDG sentence. In this case, deviation is
taken into account if it is supplied by the magnetic heading sensor. The magnetic declination which is taken
into account, is entered manually or taken from the ECDIS task database with the Auto button pressed on
Heading page of the ECDIS MASTER task Sensors panel.
Gyro
In up-to-date gyros, deviation is offset automatically. To this end, connected to the gyro are position and
speed sensors. If no such offset is available, it should be entered manually on Navigation Master in the
RADAR task on the HDG page of the Sensors panel and in the ECDIS task on Heading page of the Sensors panel
or as per table below.
RADAR Task
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
ECDIS Task
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
57
The HDG (Heading) page will display the uncorrected heading from the sensor. The corrected heading is taken
into account by the MFD and is shown in the COG/SOG/HDG/STW window of the Display Panel. The fact that
such correction is taken into account is indicated by a special symbol: a yellow triangle in the top left corner
of the PPI.
RADAR Task
ECDIS Task
In this table, speed deviation is provided in the ship’s compass heading function for the speed of 10 knots. To
determine speed deviation for other speeds, it is necessary to multiply the value obtained from the table
by the coefficient equal to the ration of the ship’s actual speed to 10.
Table 1. Speed deviations in the compass course function (for the ship speed of 10 knots). Beginning:
Compass heading
Sailing latitude
0°
30°
40°
50°
55°
60°
65°
70°
-
+
+
-
0°
180°
180°
360°
0.64
0.74
0.84
0.98
1.11
1.27
1.51
1.86
10
170
190
350
0.63
0.72
0.82
0.97
1.09
1.25
1.45
1.83
20
160
200
340
0.60
0.69
0.78
0.93
1.05
1.20
1.41
1.75
30
150
210
330
0.54
0.63
0.72
0.86
0.97
1.10
1.31
1.61
40
140
220
320
0.48
0.56
0.64
0.76
0.85
0.97
1.15
1.42
50
130
230
310
0.41
0.47
0.53
0.63
0.71
0.82
0.97
1.17
60
120
240
300
0.30
0.37
0.41
0.49
0.50
0.64
0.75
0.93
70
110
250
290
0.21
0.25
0.28
0.33
0.38
0.43
0.51
0.63
80
100
260
280
0.10
0.12
0.15
0.17
0.19
0.22
0.26
0.32
90
90
270
270
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
58
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Table 2. Speed deviations in the compass course function (for the ship speed of 10 knots). Continued:
Compass heading
Sailing latitude
73°
75°
76°
77°
78°
79°
80°
-
+
+
-
0°
180°
180°
360°
2.18
2.46
2.63
2.83
3.06
3.34
3.66
10
170
190
350
2.14
2.42
2.59
2.78
3.01
3.28
3.62
20
160
200
340
2.04
2.31
2.47
2.66
2.88
3.14
3.45
30
150
210
330
1.89
2.13
2.28
2.45
2.65
2.89
3.18
40
140
220
320
1.67
1.88
2.01
2.16
2.34
2.55
2.85
50
130
230
310
1.28
1.58
1.69
1.82
1.97
2.15
2.36
60
120
240
300
1.69
1.23
1.32
1.42
1.53
1.67
1.84
70
110
250
290
0.74
0.85
0.89
0.96
1.04
1.19
1.24
80
100
260
280
0.37
0.42
0.45
0.48
0.52
0.57
0.64
90
90
270
270
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Draught
Compensation of sounder readings due to varying ship draught is made for each sounder on the Echosounder
page of the Sensors panel in Navigation MASTER task.
Navigational Sensors Selection
Manual Selection
Selection of Position Source
l
In the RADAR task, use POSN page of the Sensors panel to select the primary and secondary positioning
systems;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
l
59
In the ECDIS task, use Ships Position page of the Sensors panel to select the primary and secondary
positioning systems. To select, activate PRIM and SEC buttons.
POSN (Ship position) page displays all the connected coordinates sensors, as well as Dead Reckoning (DR) and
Echo Reference (ER) modes.
PRIM source data is used for making all the calculations in the navigational system. SEC source is a hot backup
for Fallback functionality.
The primary and secondary positioning systems cannot be selected simultaneously for one and the same
source.
The own ship position sensor name includes:
l
Differential mode is taken from the sentence;
l
Source number is assigned in the System Configuration utility;
l
Source alies is assigned in the System Configuration utility:
You may select a source with invalid data, which is shown in orange. In this case, the screen displays a
dialogue box requesting permission to select.
It is not possible to choose a source, which no data arrives in.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
60
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Selection of Heading Source
l
l
In the RADAR task, use HDG page of the Sensors panel to select a heading source whose data will
henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the system;
In the ECDIS task, use Heading page of the Sensors panel to select a heading source whose data will
henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the system.
HDG (Heading) page shows all the connected heading sensors. The heading sensors name includes alias
assigned in the System Configuration utility.
To select the main source, activate the button with the source name. The selected source data is used for
making all the calculations in the navigation system.
Magnetic compass may be selected as a course source; magnetic variation is available either for manual
selection or from the database (see above paragraph Compensations for Navigational Data, under Magnetic
Compass).
You may select a source with invalid data, which is shown in orange. In this case, the screen displays a
dialogue box requesting permission to select.
It is not possible to choose a source, which no data arrives in.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
61
Selection of STW Source
l
l
In the RADAR task, use STW page of the Sensors panel to select a source of speed through the water whose
data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the system;
In the ECDIS task, use Speed page of the Sensors panel to select a source of speed through the water
whose data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the system.
STW page (STW sources group on Speed page) shows all the connected sensors of speed through the water.
The speed sensors name includes alias is assigned in the System Configuration utility.
To select the main source, activate the button with the source name.
You may select a source with invalid data, which is shown in orange. In this case, the screen displays a
dialogue box requesting permission to select.
It is not possible to choose a source, which no data arrives in.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
62
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Selection of SOG Source
l
l
In the RADAR task, use COG/SOG page of the Sensors panel to select a source of speed over the ground
whose data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the systems;
In the ECDIS task, use Speed page of the Sensors panel to select a source of speed over the ground whose
data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the systems.
COG/SOG page (SOG sources group on Speed page) shows all the connected sensors of speed through the
water. The speed sensors name includes alias is assigned in the System Configuration utility.
You may select a source with invalid data, which is shown in orange. In this case, the screen displays a
dialogue box requesting permission to select.
It is not possible to choose a source, which no data arrives in.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Navigational Sensors
63
Selection of Depth Source
In the ECDIS task, use Echosounder page of the Sensors panel to select a source of depth whose data will
henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the systems.
Echosounder page shows all the connected depth sensors and data from the electronic chart and tidal height.
To select the main source, activate the button with the source name. The depth sensors name includes alies
is assigned in the System Configuration utility.
You may select a source with invalid data, which is shown in orange. In this case, the screen displays a
dialogue box requesting permission to select.
It is not possible to choose a source which no data arrives in.
Automatic Source Selection with Actuation of Fallback Functionality
Fallback functionality implies use of backup data source in case of the main source failure. Fallback
functionality is implemented for the following essential data:
l
Position. Sec. position source is used for the backup source, which is set on POSN page (Ship position page
for ECDIS task) of Sensors panel. If Sec. position source is not set, there is no switch to the backup;
l
Heading. The second gyro is used for a backup. The magnetic compass is not used for a backup source;
l
STW. The second log is used for a backup source.
By default, there is compulsory Fallback actuation in the case of the sensor failure.
Sensor Failure
The backup data source is switched to when the following alerts are triggered off (for alert generation
algorithm, see Display of Navigational (Essential) Information paragraph):
l
No input;
l
No data.
Also the backup data source is switched to when invalid data is received.
If the main data source does not recover its functions within the set time after the alarm generation, Fallback
caution is activated, the system switches over to the backup source. There is no switchover to the backup
source unless it has passed all the necessary checks.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
64
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Differential Mode Lost
A switchover to the backup data source occurs with a differential mode loss by the ship’s position sensor (the
letter “D” in the source name stops to be displayed). If the differential mode is not recovered within the set
time after its loss and the system switches over to the backup source. The timeout is set to 15 sec. There is no
switchover to the backup source unless it operates in the differential mode.
Automatic Restoration Function
After the main data source has restored its regular operation, there is no automatic switchover back to it.
Upon expiry of the set time, there is a user request to restore it as the main data source. The timeout is set to
10 sec.
If OK is pressed, the system switches over to this data source.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Other Sensors
65
Other Sensors
Wind Interface
Data on the wind speed and force is supplied by the wind sensor according to IEC 61162-1 (MWV sentence
specifying the relative or true wind).
The table shows the content of information displayed in System Information display in accordance with
available NMEA sentences.
Data available for
MWD
VWR
MFD
MWV
Relative
Theoretical
Only wind sensor True wind
Relative wind
Relative wind
No information displayed
Wind + COG +
True wind
Relative wind
Relative wind
No information displayed
True wind
Relative wind
Relative wind
True wind
SOG
Wind + HDG
Wind + HDG +
COG + SOG
l
True wind;
Relative wind recalculated from true
l
Relative
wind;
l
Relative
wind;
True wind
re-calculated
from relative
l
l
l
True wind;
Relative wind recalculated from true
l
l
True wind
re-calculated
from relative
Wind data can be displayed in three ways:
l
True wind value is received – shown on System Information (True Wind) display;
l
Relative wind value is received – shown on System Information (Relative Wind) display;
l
If correct data from the gyro (HDG) and positioning system (COG and SOG) is available, wind is recalculated from relative to true if the relative wind sensor is installed, and the other way round; if the
positioning system is DR, correct data from the gyro (HDG) and log (STW – relative or ground speed) can
be used for wind recalculations.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
66
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Wind recalculations from relative to true and the other way round are made according to the algorithm
shown below:
The necessary condition for the wind re-calculations in the ECDIS task is the availability of:
l
Compass course value (HDG);
l
Vector of the ship motion over the ground (COG/SOG).
It is necessary to remember the two main rules for re-calculating wind from relative to true:
l
Relative wind is blowing in the same side as the true wind;
l
The relative wind’s track angle is always smaller than the true wind track angle.
On the ECDIS task screen, the true wind vector can be displayed in two modes:
l
Wind vector;
l
Wind card.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Other Sensors
67
Wind vectors are shown on the ECDIS task screen in accordance with its designation on the traditional sea
weather charts.
The Wind card represents a circle in the top right corner of the Chart panel.
An arrow with a digital value shows the wind direction, and its speed is shown as a digital value in the centre.
Modes are switched on the Route Monitoring page of the Monitoring panel (see document Multi-Functional
Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS User Manual, Chapter 11, section Obtaining Curren System Information).
Drift
If data is available from the EPFS, compass and log (COG, SOG, HDG, STW), an additional ship motion
parameter is calculated: drift. The drift characteristics (direction and speed) are determined as the difference
of COG-SOG and HDG-STW vectors.
The ECDIS task makes drift calculations if there is correct data supplied by the compass, log and positioning
system (HDG, STW, COG, SOG). With the use of speed vector triangle, the drift direction and speed are
calculated from the trigonometric formulae. The drawing below shows an example of drift calculations in the
graphic form.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
68
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The drift characteristics are shown on System Information display of the Control Panel.
Calculated
From Drift Sensor
It is also possible to display data supplied by the drift sensor according to IEC 61162-1 standard in VDR
sentence. To enable this, the drift sensor is required to be connected in the System Configuration utility (see
document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration ,
paragraph Sensors Settings).
To switch between different drift sources, use the Drift page of the Sensors panel which starts to be displayed
when the drift sensor is connected.
When it is disconnected (checkbox is unchecked), calculated data is used.
Temperature
Data on the sea water temperature is supplied by the temperature sensor according to IEC 61162-1 standard
in MTW sentence. MTW sentence always uses Celsius scale (ºC) and degrees for the measurement unit. The
temperature is shown on System Information display.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 2. Information Sensors • Other Sensors
69
VDR Output
To ensure the MFD compatibility with a new standard of the VDR which has a network interface, a module
outputting data to the VDR can operate on each workstation.
With appropriate settings in the System Configuration utility (see document Multi-Functional Display (v.
3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item VDR
Output Configuring), the following data is output to the network:
l
For the radar and additional stations:
o
l
Screenshots – once every 15 seconds.
For the ECDIS:
o
Screenshots – once every 15 seconds;
o
Chart list (source info) – once every 10 minutes or within 2 seconds of the displayed charts set change.
Information is not sent unless the relevant application is in the active mode.
The protocol for sending binary files with acknowledgements is used for sending screenshots. A simplified
protocol without acknowledgements is used for the chart list (source info).
When data is output to the VDR, the workstation name is specified for the source position, and the station’s
main task set during the configuring – for the source identifier.
The sending of data to the VDR should be set for all the ECDIS stations on the bridge.
The VDR output functionality complies with the following standards:
l
IEC 61162-450 ed. 1;
l
IEC 61174;
l
IEC 61996 ed. 2 CDV.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3.
Navigational Tools
This chapter provides a description of functionality used in the Navigation Mode.
ECDIS Task Cursors
Free Cursor
Graphic Cursor
RADAR Task Cursors
Free Cursor
Graphics Cursor
Multi-Units Support
Own Ship Motion Data
Own Ship Motion Parameters
Own Ship Motion Vectors
Ship Symbol on the Electronic Charts
Split Screen
Display of Chart Information on the ECDIS Task Screen
AutoZoom Mode
Ahead Functionality
EBL/VRM
Relative and True Motion Modes
Man Overboard (MOB) Mode
General Information
Displayed Parameters
Additional Control
Manually Fixed Position
General Information
Input of Source Data
Line of Position Referencing
Display of Calculated Ship Position
Colour Indication of Measurement Numbers
72
72
75
76
76
78
79
80
80
80
82
83
83
84
85
85
86
86
86
86
87
87
87
88
89
93
94
72
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
ECDIS Task Cursors
Free Cursor
The ECDIS task provides a capability to use a free cursor, which is moved over the entire screen by the
trackball/mouse acquiring various forms in different ECDIS task areas.
In the functional panel areas, the cursor acquires the form of an arrow and operates as a standard Windows
cursor.
In the chart area of Main panel, the cursor may have a form of different tools switched by pressing the right
trackball/mouse button:
l
Free View cursor.
View cursor has some additional capabilities as it is positioned on certain objects acquiring a distinctive
form in the process:
o
- Standard View cursor shape; as the left trackball/mouse button is pressed, Review function is
turned on, whilst the cursor acquires the form of a graphics cursor
;
o
- View cursor appearance when positioned on a target; a press on the left trackball/mouse button
calls the target data card;
o
- View cursor appearance when positioned on a lighthouse; a press on the left trackball/mouse
button calls the lighthouse data card (see also Chapter 1, section Info, paragraph Information on Chart
Objects);
o
- View cursor appearance when positioned on a waypoint; a press on the left trackball/mouse
button calls the WPT data card.
In the Navigation mode, it is possible to view charts in an area located far from the own ship symbol position,
the capability implemented in Review function.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • ECDIS Task Cursors
73
It activates the graphic cursor moved by the mouse/trackball on the ECDIS task screen. Data on the cursor
coordinates and position relative to the ship position is displayed in a special window:
While the sailing areas not covering the ship position are viewed, the display of the current ship
coordinates, or tracking of objects representing danger to navigation, is not interrupted. For the
immediate return to the display of the area where the ship is located, use Ahead function.
l
Free Zoom cursor.
- Standard Zoom cursor appearance. A press on the left trackball/mouse button turns on Zoom
function whilst the cursor assumes the form of graphic cursor
l
.
Free ERBL cursor.
- Standard ERBL cursor appearance. A press on the left trackball/mouse button turns on ERBL
function whilst the cursor assumes the form of a graphic cursor
. After a second press on the left
trackball/mouse button, the cursor obtains the second form of the graphic cursor
.
This is an electronic tool used in the ECDIS task for the range and bearing measurements.
Note: WGS-84 datum is used for the calculations of all the ranges and directions.
In the relative motion mode, the ERBL operates in three modes which are switched with the left
trackball/mouse button:
o
ERBL-Relative mode. In this case, bearing and range to any point on the ECDIS task screen are
measured relative to the ship position. The cursor is attached to the point of the ECDIS task screen
where it is set. If the cursor is immobile, then as the ship is moving, geographic coordinates are
changing in the cursor information window, whereas the bearing and range remain constant:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
74
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
o
ERBL-True mode. In this case, bearing and range to any electronic chart point are measured relative to
the ship position. The cursor is attached to the chart point where it is set. If the cursor is immobile,
then as the ship
is moving, the range and bearing are changing in the cursor information window, whereas
the geographic coordinates remain constant:
o
ERBL mode. In this case, the bearing and range to any electronic chart point are measured relative to
the point where the cursor was set in ERBL-True mode:
In the true motion mode, the ERBL operates in a similar manner in two modes: ERBL-True and ERBL.
l
Free Info cursor.
As Info function is enabled (by pressing
acquisition cursor
button on the Control Panel or on the Chart panel), the
appears which can be positioned on the necessary object. A press on the left
trackball/mouse button opens Info panel, and the cursor assumes the form of a standard Info cursor
l
ARPA acquisition cursor
with target acquisition function ON. (Acquire button on Acquisition page of
Targets display is pressed, also see Chapter 9, ARPA section);
l
AIS activation cursor
;
l
Cursor for cancelling ARPA tracking
l
AIS deactivation cursor
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
.
;
.
75
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • ECDIS Task Cursors
Graphic Cursor
The graphic cursor is used during the operation of some of ECDIS task functions and represents an
intersection of lines corresponding to the latitude and longitude of the given point, but the form of the
graphic cursor can be changed as required on Config panel:
l
Long – the cursor is shown in the form of an intersection of two lines across the entire Chart panel
l
Short – the cursor is shown in the form of a small cross
;
.
Such cursor is moved by using the trackball/mouse. It is also possible to manually enter the coordinates of
the point where the cursor should be positioned (after switching the activity from the cursor to the
Information Window by pressing <Tab> key).
The Information window which appears in the menu area simultaneously with the graphic cursor, can
contain the following data:
l
Name of this window reflecting the ECDIS task functional capability using the graphics cursor;
l
Cursor position coordinates;
l
Values of its direct and reverse bearings and distance from the ownship position (in miles and meters);
l
CPA/TCPA to the place indicated with the cursor.
A modification of the graphic cursor is an acquisition marker
. This auxiliary tool represents a square
orange coloured box with a dot in the centers, and is usedin various functions for the acquisition of objects
displayed on the ECDIS task screen. To control the acquisition marker and obtain information on its position,
use the procedure similar to that detailed for the graphic cursor.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
76
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
RADAR Task Cursors
Free Cursor
General
The MFD provides a capability to use a free cursor, which is moved over the entire screen by the
trackball/mouse acquiring various forms in different MFD areas.
In the RADAR task, at a distance of up to 3 miles, distance from the PPI centre to the cursor position can be
shown in metres and NM. The units of measurement are selected on the System page of the Settings panel.
Within the entire MFD area, except for PPI, the cursor acquires the form of an arrow and operates as a
standard Windows cursor.
The free cursor within the PPI, when positioned on different objects, can assume the following form and
perform the corresponding functions:
l
– ARPA acquisition cursor;
l
– AIS activation cursor;
l
– cursor for cancelling ARPA tacking;
l
–AIS deactivation cursor;
l
– cursor for obtaining information on targets;
l
– cursor for activating VRM, EBL, Index Line and Guard zones boundaries motion;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • RADAR Task Cursors
77
Change of the Free Cursor Appearance as it Hits the Target
Depending on which object the cursor hits on the radar screen, it can assume different forms:
button is not pressed:
l
o
– free cursor on the radar echo (targets can be acquired for ARPA tracking);
o
– free cursor on a steadily tracked ARPA target;
o
– free cursor on an active AIS target;
o
– free cursor on a non-active AIS target.
button is pressed:
l
o
– free cursor on an active AIS target with a radar echo under it;
o
– free cursor on an ARPA.
Switching Free Cursor Type on Targets
To switch the free cursor type, press successively the right trackball/mouse button. Cursor type priorities are
set depending on the position button. If a certain free cursor type is not applicable, it is omitted. If there are
simultaneously several targets of the same type under the cursor, the free cursor type is switched for each
target, i.e. as many times as there are targets.
There are the following priorities in the free cursor types as it is positioned on different targets:
l
buttons is not pressed.
Target type
Number of times the right trackball button is pressed
0
1
ARPA target under
which there is a nonactive AIS target
2
3
4
(AIS target)
(ARPA target)
5
Active AIS target under
which there is a radar
echo
ARPA target
Active AIS target
ARPA target under
which there is a nonactive AIS target
ARPA target under
which there is an active
AIS target
(AIS target)
(ARPA target)
(AIS target)
(AIS target)
(ARPA target)
(AIS target)
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
78
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
button is pressed.
Target type
Number of times the right trackball button is pressed
0
1
2
3
(AIS target)
(ARPA target)
ARPA target with an active
AIS target under it
4
Free Cursor with Different Display Presentation
With N Up and C Up presentation, the Cursor window shows true bearing to the free cursor position on the
PPI.
With H Up presentation, the Cursor window shows relative bearing to the free cursor position on the PPI.
Graphics Cursor
The graphic cursor is used during the operation of some of MFD functions and represents an intersection of a
small orange cross
.
A modification of the graphic cursor is an acquisition marker. This auxiliary MFD tool represents a square
orange coloured box with a dot in the centres
, and is used in various functions for the acquisition of
objects displayed on the PPI. To control the acquisition marker and obtain information on its position, use
the procedure similar to that detailed for the graphics cursor.
As Info function is enabled (by pressing
button on the Control Button Area), the acquisition marker
appears which can be positioned on the necessary object. A press on the left trackball/mouse button opens
Info panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Multi-Units Support
79
Multi-Units Support
Attention! There is no multi-unit support for the RADAR task.
The MFD provides a capability to use different measurement units. It is possible to set measurement units
for the following values:
l
Own ship and target speed in knots (kt) or kilometres per hour (km/h);
l
Distance in miles (NM), kilometres (km), statute miles (stm) or hectometres (hm);
l
Precision distance in metres (m) feet (ft) or yards (yrd);
l
Depths and heights in metres (m), feet (ft) or fathoms (fms);
l
Draught in metres (m) or feet (ft);
l
Wind speed in metres per second (m/s), kilometres per hour (km/h) or knots (kt);
l
Temperature in degrees Celsius (C) or degrees Fahrenheit (F).
Measurement units are set on Units page on the Config panel.
It should be noted that the selected units would be the same for all the depth and height values in the MFD.
This refers to the chart data, depth information received from the sounder, and information on tides.
For TX-97 format on the electronic charts, the depth is displayed according to the following rules depending
on the selected measurement units:
l
Depth is measured in metres;
l
Depth is measured in feet;
l
Depth is measured in fathoms. In this case, depth of up to 11 fathoms which have a fractional part, are
shown in fathoms and feet. Depths of more than 11 fathoms are shown in fathoms only.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
80
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Own Ship Motion Data
Own Ship Motion Parameters
Ship motion parameters are its course and speed.
The ECDIS task uses the following types of parameters:
l
Ship’s true motion direction – COG;
l
True speed – SOG;
l
Compass course – HDG;
l
Log speed – STW.
Course (HDG) and speed (STW) data is provided from the gyro and log or is relayed from the information
sensors.
Along with the ship positioning and ship time sensor, information on the own ship motion data is essential
for all the navigational calculations connected with the own ship motion.
Own Ship Motion Vectors
Motion vector is used for the graphic display of the ship course and speed. There may be two such vectors,
and they correspond to the positioning system:
l
COG – SOG (for PS and ER systems);
l
HDG – STW.
No display of vectors is provided for the secondary method. In case of the primary method, it is possible to
turn on the display of two vectors simultaneously (COG-SOG and HDG-STW). The point of origin of these
vectors display is the centre of the ship symbol or contour:
The display of vectors is enabled on Route Monitoring page of Monitoring panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Own Ship Motion Data
81
Switching of the own ship symbol display orientation along the ship’s true motion (COG) vector, or along the
vector of the ship’s motion is performed by using Align by... function on Route Monitoring page of Monitoring
panel:
l
l
Orientation of the own ship symbol display along the ship’s true motion (COG) vector:
Orientation of the own ship symbol display along the vector of the ship’s motion as per the course
detector (gyro) reading:
Operation on the setting of the motion vector length for both own ship and the targets, is performed by
using drop-down list in the Vectors window of the Control Panel window:
Vector length values may vary from 1 to 24 minutes:
In addition, it is possible to set the fixed vector length value (which does not change with the change of the
chart scale) – Fixed. In this case, the speed vector length is represented by a segment whose value is equal to
the fixed number of graphic pixels regardless of the current screen scale.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
82
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Ship Symbol on the Electronic Charts
Standard Presentation
The ECDIS task provides for two positioning systems: Primary and Secondary whose accuracy ensures
navigational safety. The ship symbol on the ECDIS task screen is shown in black colour (primary system) or
blue (secondary system). The secondary positioning system performs the check functions.
There are two ways to display the ship symbol on the electronics chart, set on Route Monitoring page of
Monitoring panel:
l
Ship by contour – as a ship contour on the chart scales commensurate with the ship dimensions, or
a ship position symbol on small scale charts;
l
Ship by symbol – as a ship position symbol regardless of the current screen
scale.
User Ship Contour
User ship contour function serves for displaying the own ship contour on the ECDIS task Chart panel,
proportionate to its actual dimensions specified in the drawings and ship documents. This function is
intended for improving navigational safety of ships with non-standard shape (tugboats, military ships, special
purpose vessels), as well as of standard sea ships in the constricted areas, on the fairways, during the stay at
anchor or mooring operations, etc.
The drawing of the own ship contour is loaded in the MFD system from an external carrier via the Data Tool
utility (User Ship Contour group). The necessary own ship contour is selected in the System Configuration
utility.
Attention! After installing the own ship contour, check if these contour dimensions correspond to the ship
dimensions entered in the System Configuration utility (INS panel, Ship settings page).
For this function to be used in the MFD, it is necessary to order an appropriate option (delivered to the user
as a special file).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Split Screen
83
Split Screen
Display of Chart Information on the ECDIS Task Screen
Main panel is the main Chart panel which is intended for the following purposes:
l
Display of electronic charts showing the chart information classes (determined on Charts panel);
l
Display of own ship symbol with motion vectors;
l
Display of the monitored route;
l
Display of target symbols with motion vectors;
l
Display of tides and currents information.
Main panel is always displayed on the ECDIS task screen; Dual panel is displayed by using the tab in the
bottom part of the ECDIS task screen. Dual panel is an additional Chart panel and serves for the navigation
mode only. It constantly shows the own ship symbol, but does not show the targets, some of the functions
are not available (Ahead, Info, etc.).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
84
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
For an easier monitoring of the passing of waypoint during the sailing along the route, Dual panel implements
AutoZoom mode.
AutoZoom Mode
During the sailing along the monitored route, the ECDIS task provides AutoZoom functionality, which enables
the automatic increase of scale as the next waypoint is approached. AutoZoom mode is available on Dual
panel only.
The mode is turned on by pressing
button, as this is done, the chart display on Dual panel is oriented by
the current route leg (Course Up), and the relative motion mode sets (Relative motion).
The ECDIS task analyses DTW at an interval set in Time of update window. As DTW is decreasing, the ECDIS
task increases the scale by one fixed scale value so that the ship position remains within Dual panel. With the
ship approaching the boundary of Dual panel in the process of manoeuvres, the scale may be reduced by one
fixed scale value.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Ahead Functionality
85
Adjustment of AutoZoom mode is made on “General” page of Config panel:
l
Maximum scale is the maximum electronic chart scale as the ship is passing the current WPT on Dual panel;
l
Time of update is the DTW analysis interval.
With a change of the WPT, the scale is set so that Dual panel displays the ship symbol, current leg of the
monitored route and the current WPT.
Ahead Functionality
Ahead functionality is intended for re-drawing the screen with the vessel symbol shifting in the direction
opposite to the current course; and to turn on Navigation Mode. Ahead
button on the Chart panel
toolbar is used for the purpose (see also document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS User Manual,
Chapter 3, section Use of ECDIS Task Tools, paragraph Return of Own Ship Symbol Display to the ECDIS Task
Screen).
Upon a press on this button, the following occurs:
1. The ship symbol is on the ECDIS task screen. The chart scale does not change regardless of whether the
Autoscale functionality is ON or OFF.
2. The ship symbol is not available on the ECDIS task screen (Position Dropped). With the Autoscale
functionality ON, the ship is set in the required position on the ECDIS task screen, the largest scale chart
under the ship is loaded on the original scale.
3. The ship symbol is not available on the ECDIS task screen (Position Dropped). With the Autoscale
functionality OFF, the ship is set in the required position on the ECDIS task screen, the projection scale
does not change, it is the chart under the ship closest to the set scale which is loaded.
EBL/VRM
This function is intended for displaying the electronic bearing line (EBL) and variable range marker (VRM).
The system has a capability to simultaneously display two mutually independent EBL/VRM groups on the
Chart panel, which also allows setting the bearing and distance of the base point shift relative to the current
ship position.
Control of the function is from EBL/VRM/CHL window on the Control Panel, or from ES6 keyboard.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
86
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Relative and True Motion Modes
Two modes are used for the display of the ship motion on the Chart panel toolbar:
l
True Motion mode (turned on by selecting
l
Relative Motion mode (turned on by selecting
button);
button).
Man Overboard (MOB) Mode
General Information
MOB mode enables the display of information on a geographic point saved at a certain time. It is made
available by pressing the hotkey on the keyboard or the
button on the Chart panel toolbar. As this is
done, the system makes a logbook entry which contains the name of the event: “MOB ENABLED” and a full
set of recorded parameters.
Displayed Parameters
As MOB mode is activated, the Control Panel displays a panel shown below:
The following parameters can be displayed:
l
Coordinates of MOB mode activation;
l
Time elapsed since MOB mode was activated;
l
Bearing from the ship current position to the activation point;
l
Distance from the ship current position to the activation point.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Manually Fixed Position
87
Additional Control
A press on Set time… button opens a box for setting the MOB event time.
After the time has been specified, MOB point is set in the own ship track point closest to the entered time.
A press on Set pos… opens a box shown below used for setting the coordinates:
After the input of coordinates (manually or by cursor), MOB display is re-drawn to suit the entered data (e.g.,
upon receipt of coordinates from another ship).
A second press on MOB button in the Chart panel turns MOB mode off and Display Panel window assumes the
previous appearance. As this occurs, an electronic log entry containing “MOB DISABLED” event name, is made.
Manually Fixed Position
General Information
The Manually Fix Position method enables construction of the ship’s Lines of Position (LOP) by measuring
bearing and/or distance to a visible object whose coordinates are known in advance (or the object can be
uniquely identified on the chart). LOP can further be used for entering ship position corrections and for other
navigational tasks. Up to 6 LOP’s can be constructed simultaneously. Work with source data for the LOP
construction is done on Manually Fix Position display of Display Panel window on the Control Panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
88
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Input of Source Data
Input of source data for the LOP construction (bearing and/or distance) can only be made manually. Initially
available is only 1 button. The rest of buttons which no measurements have been made for yet, are disabled.
By default, for the observation time in the Time field the current UTC time minus 5 minutes is specified. The
user can set any time within minus 2 hours from the current UTC time.
The bearing and/or range are entered in the relevant fields, which are enabled depending on the selected
measurement type.
The entered data is not accepted for processing by MFD until Apply button is pressed. With Automatic jump to
new LOP checkbox checked, there is an automatic switch to the input of the next measurement results. In this
case, D box shows the time difference between the input of the first and current measurements, and it is the
time which is taken into account in the ship position calculations from the position lines.
On the Chart panel, data accepted for processing MFD (Apply button has been pressed), is displayed in the
following way:
l
l
l
Time – position fix time;
Bearing – a blinking straight red coloured line to the point of the own ship track where the ship was at the
time specified in the Time box;
Distance – blinking red coloured circle centred in the point of the own ship track where the ship was at the
time specified in the Time box.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Manually Fixed Position
89
The name of the Move and reference button is shown in red and is blinking.
Line of Position Referencing
After the input of measurement results, it is necessary to reference them to the appropriate objects on the
Chart panel. Using Move and reference button of Manually Fix Position also performs display the position line
referencing.
The graphic cursor is positioned on the chart, and the LOP is moved to the required object with the
trackball/mouse. Click the left trackball/mouse button to fix the referencing to the object. If referenced,
LOP’s cannot change their direction, only a parallel shift is possible. After referencing, LOP’s are displayed in
the orange colour and end in the reference object as shown in the drawing below.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
90
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
If a position line is at a distance of 1 mile or more from the reckoned position, it is shown in the red colour.
If during the referencing, the Snap to Object function is turned on, with the LOP beginning/centre within a
circle with a radius of 0.5 mile from the reference object, the LOP is automatically referenced to the object on
the chart. As this occurs, the Name box of the Manually Fix Position display shows, depending on the chart
format, the object name or type which is extracted from the object on the chart. Object names are available
for the S-57 charts only. For the TX-97 format charts, the object type only is taken.
The table below provides examples of object types (S57 and TX-97 charts), which extracts from the charts are
available for.
Table 1. S-57 format charts
No Object
Description/Expected input
1
LNDMRK
A prominent object at a fixed location which can be used in
(Land
determining a location or a direction
marks)
Tower
Light support
The individual name of an object
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
INT
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Manually Fixed Position
No Object
Description/Expected input
2
BUISGL
A relatively permanent structure, roofed and usually walled. It is
(Single
designed for some particular use which it may be important to
building)
indicate (Digital Geographic Information Working Group)
91
INT
Light support
The individual name of an object
3
LITVES
A distinctively marked vessel anchored or moored at a charted point,
(Light
to serve as an aid to navigation. By night, it displays a characteristic
vessels)
light(s) and is usually equipped with other devices, such as fog signal,
submarine sound signal, and radio-beacon, to assist navigation. Also
called light ship
The individual name of an object
4
LITFLT
A boat-like structure used instead of a light buoy in waters where
(Light float)
strong streams or currents are experienced, or when a greater
elevation than that of a light buoy is necessary
The individual name of an object
5
6
OFSPLF
Lighted offshore platform.
(Offshore
A permanent offshore structure, either fixed or floating, used in the
platform)
production of oil or natural gas
BCNSPP
A beacon is a prominent specially constructed object forming a
(Special
conspicuous mark as a fixed aid to navigation or for use in
purpose
hydrographic survey
beacon)
7
LNDMRK
All the rest except for
(Land
item1
marks)
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
92
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
No Object
Description/Expected input
INT
No Object
Description\Expected input
Comments
1
LH
Light house
General name – LH
2
BO
7 – Beacon
General name – Fixed
13 – Platform
point
8
BCNCAR
(Cardinal
beacon)
9
BCNLAT
(Lateral
beacon)
10
BCNSAV
(Safe water
beacon)
11
DAYMAR
(Squire or
rectangular
work)
23 – Fixed point
3
HG
2 – building
General names are per
3 – Chimney
the Description column
4 – Church
6 – Tower
8 – Triangulation point
9 – Radio mast
The Delete button serves for deleting measurement data. The rest of LOP’s are automatically shifted to the
vacant place to the left (re-numbered). A press on the Move and reference button again results in the
repeated LOP referencing process. If, in the process of repeated referencing, the user presses the right mouse
button, the current LOP referencing is cancelled. After referencing, the LOP’s are shown in the constant
orange colour. The name of the Move and reference button is shown in black.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 3. Navigational Tools • Manually Fixed Position
93
Display of Calculated Ship Position
After the construction of two crossed position lines, the orange coloured
symbol with the letters EP
(Estimated Position) appears on the Chart panel in the point with calculated ship position coordinates. Next
to it, the time which this point is calculated for, is specified.
RMS Error field on Manually Fix Position display shows accuracy of determining a fixed position. The user can
accept this accuracy at the stage of making a decision on the input of an offset from the measurement results.
Accuracy is determined from the referenced LOP’s. Data is not available until at least 2 readings are taken.
If it is necessary to accept the results of manually fix position, use Accept position button. At the moment when
the position is accepted, an “Position Fix” event is recorded, and an entry is made in the Electronic system
logbook.
In this case, if the PS positioning system is set, the black coloured
symbol on the Chart panel shows the
ship position determined by using the Manually Fix Position. If three or more LOP’s were used for the ship
positioning, next to the
symbol the Fix notation is shown with the time which this point is calculated for
specified. The ship position determined with the aid of the PS source for the same time, is also displayed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
94
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
These points have accordingly the EP (Fix) name and the PS source name (GPS in this case).
With the use of the DR mode, calculated ship position coordinates are accepted. On the Chart panel, the
black coloured
symbol is used for showing the ship’s EP and DR position. In this case, the ship position
calculations are continued from the EP point determined by using the Manually Fix Position.
Next to the EP (Fix) name, measurements which the position was determined form are specified:
l
R – Range LOP’s;
l
V – Visual Bearing LOP’s;
l
VR – Visual/Range LOP’s.
Colour Indication of Measurement Numbers
Colour indication of measurement numbers on Manually Fix Position display is in accordance with the table
below:
Colour
Comments
Blue
Vacant cell for setting measurement
White
Data is entered but the line of position is not referenced by the user
Black
Bearing/range has already been references to a conspicuous chart feature
Red
With LOP advice checkbox checked. The reading has been taken and referenced, but the system considers
it to be incorrect, the LOP being at a distance of more than one mile from the reckoned position
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4.
Alert Management
This chapter describes the alarm, warning and cautions generation algorithms, as well
as their display and acknowledgement methods.
Display of Alerts
Alerts Acknowledgement
Indications
Display of Indications
Display of Important Indications
Notifications
Guidance for Adjustments of the Limits for Alerts
Main Alerts Generation Principles
Safety Alerts
Navigational Alerts
Route Alerts
Target/Radar Alerts
Sensors Alarms
Hardware Alerts
96
99
100
100
101
103
104
106
106
112
114
115
117
119
96
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Display of Alerts
The number of alarms shall be kept as low as possible by providing indications for information of lower
importance (MSC 86(70) Annex 3, 4.3.5), this is why only very important messages are classified as alarms in
the MFD. The MFD processes alerts in a similar manner, the only difference being in their display.
Alarm – high-priority alert. Condition requiring immediate attention and action by the bridge team, to
maintain the safe navigation of the ship.
Warning – condition requiring immediate attention, but no immediate action by the bridge team. Warnings
are presented for precautionary reasons to make the bridge team aware of changed conditions which are not
immediately hazardous, but may become so if no action is taken.
Caution - lowest priority of an alert. Awareness of a condition which does not warrant an alarm or warning
condition, but still requires attention out of the ordinary consideration of the situation or of given
information.
Alarms, warnings and cautions are displayed in the Alerts window located in the top part of the ECDIS task
screen, to the right of the COG/SOG/HDG/STW window:
The Alerts window is presented in the form of three buttons:
l
l
l
- to open a list of generated alarms;
- to open a list of generated warnings;
- to open a list of generated cautions.
Icons on the Alarms button are shown according to the priority:
l
l
l
l
l
- flashing if there is at least one active unacknowledged alarm;
- flashing if there is at least one active silenced alarm;
- flashing if there is at least one rectified unacknowledged alarm;
- f there is at least one active acknowledged alarm;
- if there are no alarms.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Display of Alerts
97
Icons on the Warnings button are shown according to the priority:
l
l
l
l
l
- flashing if there is at least one active unacknowledged warning;
- flashing if there is at least one active silenced warning;
- flashing if there is at least one rectified unacknowledged warning;
- if there is at least one active acknowledged warning;
- if there are no warnings.
Icons on the Cautions button are shown according to the priority:
l
l
- if there is at least one active caution;
- if there are no cautions.
Alarms are associated with a sound signal, 3 beeps every 7 seconds.
Warnings are associated with a sound signal, 2 beeps every 5 minutes.
A press on the alert button opens a pull-down list which contains all the currently active alerts and rectified
unacknowledged alerts (except cautions, they are require no acknowledgement):
The alert name is preceded by the name of its source. The name of the alarm source is shown in red colour.
The name of the warning source is shown in yellowish orange colour. The name of the caution source is
shown in yellow colour:
l
MFD – alert refers to the entire MFD;
l
ECDIS – alert refers to the ECDIS task in the scope of entire MFD;
l
RADAR – alert refers to the RADAR task in the scope of entire MFD;
l
TCS – alert refers to the TCS mode;
l
INS – alert refers to the INS mode;
Alarms and warnings may be active, i.e., what caused their generation has not been eliminated, and rectified
when the cause is eliminated. Active and rectified alarms and warnings may have the following status:
l
Acknowledged – acknowledged by the operator;
l
Unacknowledged – unacknowledged by the operator.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
98
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The principles of displaying alerts in the Alarms, Warnings and Cautions drop-down lists are set forth in the
table below:
Alert status
Font
Color of
Source
Blinking Sound
generation
Active unacknowledged alarms (no operator actions taken)
Bold
Red
Yes
Yes
Active unacknowledged alarms silenced, but to be acknowledged
Bold
Red
Yes
No
Active acknowledged alarms
Bold
Red
No
No
Rectified unacknowledged alarms
Regular
Red
Yes
Yes
Rectified acknowledged alarms
No
No
No
No
Active unacknowledged warnings
Bold
Yellowish
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
in the relevant task
orange
Active unacknowledged warnings silenced, but to be
Bold
acknowledged in the relevant task
Active acknowledged warnings
Yellowish
orange
Bold
Yellowish
orange
Rectified unacknowledged warnings
Regular
Yellowish
orange
Rectified acknowledged warnings
No
No
No
No
Active caution
Bold
Yellow
No
No
Rectified caution
No
No
No
No
At the beginning of the list, there are active unacknowledged alerts arranged in the growing age order. If the
alert is unacknowledged, the name of its source is blinking. The age of the alert is specified to the right of the
alert.
The second half of the list is occupied by active acknowledged alerts. Names of alerts and their sources are
shown in regular fonts. Alerts in this part of the list are sorted by their acknowledgment time (the most
recently acknowledged alarm/warning is placed at the very top, etc.).
Rectified acknowledged alerts are deleted from the list.
Positioning the free cursor on the alert name in the list displays a hint showing the detailed alert name.
By default, alerts in the drop-down lists are aggregated in groups. There is no aggregation unless two or more
alerts belonging to the group are generated. Aggregation principles are specified in the table of alerts (see
Annex D).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Alerts Acknowledgement
99
In this case, the "+" sign is shown to the right of the group name. A press on this sign displays a list of alerts
included in the group. The source is specified for a group of alerts.
The principle of displaying an icon before the group name is the same as for the Alarms, Warnings and Cautions
buttons on the Control panel (priorities are shown in the table above).
The history of all the alerts generation and their acknowledgement is shown on the History panel of the BAM
Viewer application (see also document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Additional Functions, Chapter 6).
Alerts Acknowledgement
After familiarising him/herself with an alert, the operator acknowledges it. Distinction is drawn between the
acknowledgement of the alert audible (silencing) and visual announcement (acknowledgement).
Acknowledgement is made on any operating panel which is directly assigned to the function generating the
announcement, and where the cause of the announcement and related information for decision support is
presented. According to this concept, alerts are classed into the following categories:
Alert
Visual indication
category
A
Alerts for which graphical information at the task station directly assigned to the function generating the
alert is necessary, as decision support for the evaluation the alert related condition
B
Alerts where no additional information for decision support is necessary besides the information which
can be presented at the central alert management HMI
C
Alerts that cannot be acknowledged on the bridge but for which information is required about the status
and treatment of the alert
Alerts generated in the ECDIS, RADAR tasks, as well as in the INS and TCS modes have categories A and B.
Depending on the alerts category, acknowledgement can be made as follows:
Alert status
Where acknowledgement can be made
Alert generated for one task (e. g. Crossing safety contour)
Any station, only this task
Alert generated for all the tasks (e. g. Position failure)
Any station, any task
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
100
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
There are three ways to acknowledge an alert:
l
l
l
By pressing the Unacknowledged button in the line with the alert name in the Alerts page of the
BAM Viewer; if this alert cannot be acknowledged from this applicationn, the alert is silenced;
By pressing the <ALARM> button on the ES6 keyboard. The most recently generated alarm will be
acknowledged. By pressing successively the <ALARM> button you will acknowledge all the alarms in the
order reverse to their generation. Then all the warnings are acknowledged in the order reverse to their
generation;
By selecting the alert from a pull-down list of alarms or warnings which is opened by pressing the Alarms
and Warnings buttons on the Control Panel.
If all the alarms (warnings) are acknowledged, Alarms and Warnings buttons on the Control panel assumes the
following form:
and
.
Indications
Indication - display of regular information and conditions, not part of alert management.
Important indication - marking of an operational status of displayed information which needs special
attention, for example, information with low integrity or invalid information.
Display of Indications
Indications are displayed in Indications window on the Control panel. The window displays the most recently
generated indication.
As a new indication appears, the drop-down list button displays the
familiarizing yourself with all the indications.
sign. Press the button for
In the absence of indications Indications window displays “No Indications” notation.
The following indications are implemented in the ECDIS task:
l
l
Default Safety Contour - this indication is displayed in the following cases:
o
If the mariner does not specify a safety contour (30 m is set by default). If the safety contour specified
by the mariner or the default 30 m contour is not in the displayed SENC, the safety contour shown is
default to the next deeper contour;
o
If the safety contour in use becomes unavailable due to a change in the source data, the next deeper
contour shown on the chart becomes the default safety contour;
No ENC available - if the area covered by the ECDIS display includes waters for which no ENC at a scale
appropriate for navigation is available.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Indications
101
Display of Important Indications
Important Indications may be displayed in different places on the ECDIS task screen.
Important indications related to the chart information are displayed in the top left corner of the Chart panel
in black against the yellow background.
The following important indications are displayed here:
l
Overscale - if the own ship position is covered by an ENC whose original scale is smaller than the current
scale of the ECDIS screen;
l
SF CNT - if the graphical indication of the detected dangers on Chart panel is turned off (checkbox Danger
highlight in the Antigrounding alerts group on the Safety Alerts page of the Monitoring panel is unchecked),
and monitoring of a safety contour, navigational hazards or some IMO area is also off (checkboxes Safety
contour, Nav. hazards in the Antigrounding alerts group and IMO areas tab on the Safety Alerts page of the
Monitoring panel);
l
Overlap - if there is overlapping of two or more ENC cells of the same usage band;
l
ENC permit expired - if the installed ENC permit has expired (the chart number is specified in the hint);
l
ENC expires in less than 30 days - if the loaded chart(s) permit(s) expire within the next 30 days;
l
ENC cancelled - if the installed ENC has been cancelled (the chart number is specified in the hint);
l
Chart information not up to date - if the installed ENC is not up-to-date (the chart number is specified in the
hint);
l
Non-ENC data - if SENC data from a non-HO source is in use;
l
Larger ENC - if a larger scale chart than that in use, is available for the vessel position;
l
Display Not Real Time - if the viewing date or date range does not match the current date.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
102
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Important indications in the RCDS (Raster Chart Display System) mode of operation (see document MultiFunctional Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS User Manual, Chapter 4, section Handling Charts and Chart Information,
paragraph Loading and Scaling Charts under Own Ship Position, item Selecting Loading Priority of Various Format
Charts):
l
RCDS - if the ECDIS equipment is operating in RCDS mode;
l
Datum Shift - if the value of a shift between the RNC geodetic datum and WGS-84 is unknown;
l
Larger RNC - if the own ship position is covered by an RNC whose original scale is smaller than the current
scale of the ECDIS screen;
l
RNC rescaled -if information is displayed on a scale different from that of the RNC.
Important indications connected with selection of the Standard Display are shown on the STD DISP selection
button in the Operational window of the Control panel:
- any display other than the Standard Display is selected on the Chart panel
l
;
- the Standard Display is selected;
l
l
- the Standard Display is selected, but some viewing group included in the
Standard Display is turned off on the Chart panel.
Important indications connected with the position and gyro offset are shown in a relevant window on the
Control panel in the form of a special symbol: a yellow triangle:
l
- primary position offset in the Primary window;
l
- secondary position offset in the Secondary window;
- gyro offset in the COG/SOG/HDG/STW
l
window.
As a free cursor is positioned on this triangle, the correction value is displayed on the pop-up prompt
window.
Important indications connected with selecting the DR and EP modes for the positioning system are shown in
the Primary and Secondary windows by the positioning source name growing yellow:
- the DR mode is selected as the source for the primary positioning system;
l
- the EP mode is selected as the source for the primary secondary
l
positioning system.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Notifications
103
For the important indications connected with no input data, no data or invalid data, see Chapter 2, section
Navigational Sensors, paragraph Display of Navigational (Essential) Information.
The important indication connected with the AIS filter On or Off status is displayed in the Vectors window (for
the description of the AIS filter see Chapter 9, section AIS, paragraph Display of AIS Targets):
l
- AIS filter is turned Off;
l
- AIS filter is turned On.
If the AIS filter button is pressed, the AIS page of the Targets display on the Control panel will promptly open.
This window also displays important indication of the AIS targets vector mode (true or relative), stabilization
mode (sea or ground) and vector time (1–24 min or Fixed).
Notifications
To inform the user of some event not directly related to navigation and not regulated by standards,
notifications are used.
Note: Notifications are displayed in the ECDIS task only.
Notifications are displayed in the top right corner of the Chart panel.
A press on the button to the right of the notification name opens a pull-down list which contains all the
notifications that the user has not yet read.
At the beginning of the list, there are notifications arranged in their growing age order.
To read a notification, use the free cursor to click on the notification name on the button or select it from the list.
Notifications that the user has read are deleted from the list.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
104
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
In some cases, an additional event occurs at the time when a notification is being read, e.g., as you are
reading an AIS message notification, the AIS Messages display of the Control panel opens up.
The MFD implements the following notifications:
l
AIS Long Range;
l
AIS message;
l
AIS route active time;
l
End of Watch;
l
IMO No changed;
l
Lock order;
l
Lock Times Message;
l
MMSI No changed;
l
Timer went off;
l
Time zone changed;
l
Water level report;
l
Weather/ wind report;
Guidance for Adjustments of the Limits
for Alerts
Alert
Condition
Set limit
Main
No data
10 sec
sensors
No input
Indication
l
Warning;
Values in
yellowish
orange
asterisks;
l
Remarks
The set limits are not
accessible for the operator
Ship’s
symbol
in red color
l
Auxiliary
No data
sensors
No input
Diff.
No DTM message, or datum different
geodetic
from WGS 84
datum
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
10 sec
l
Caution;
Values in
yellowish
orange
asterisks
l
10 sec
Warning
The set limits are not
accessible for the operator
The set limits are not
accessible for the operator
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Guidance for Adjustments of the Limits for Alerts
Alert
Condition
Set limit
Indication
Remarks
Course
Difference between current route leg
5–30°
Caution
Set by the operator
difference
and heading is larger than set
5–30°
Warning
Set by the operator
3-15°
Caution
The limit is set by the
105
(for ECDIS
mode)
Course
Difference between current route leg
difference
and heading is larger than set value
(for TCS
mode)
Heading
The difference in reading GYRO
monitor
compasses larger then set value
installation engineer and is
(for ECDIS
not accessible for the
mode)
operator
Heading
The difference in reading GYRO
monitor
compasses larger then set value
3-15°
Warning
The limit is set by the
installation engineer and is
(for TCS
not accessible for the
mode)
operator
Crossing a
The ship is approaching to navigational
navigational
danger
1–20 min Caution
Set by the operator.
Monitoring/ Safety alerts
hazard
Off-Track
The set XTD value exceeded
0.00–
Alarm
9.99 NM
XTD set by the operator.
Route Planning/Route
table
Approach to
The ship has approached a WPT
critical point
0.00–
Warning
Set by the operator
Warning
Set by the operator.
9.99 NM
Outside
The ship is leaving the set anchorage
0.00–
anchor
area
3000 m
watch area
Monitoring/Navigational
Alerts
1/2
Area with
special
Approach to navigational area
1–20 min Caution
Set by the operator.
Monitoring/Safety Alerts
conditions
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
106
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Alert
Condition
Set limit
Indication
Remarks
CPA/TCPA
CPA and TCPA are smaller than the set
CPA
Alarm
Set by the operator
ones
0.0–60
0–20 min Alarm
Set by the operator.
min
TCPA
0.00–
24.00
NM
Crossing
With a change of a chart set under the
safety
ship position, the previously selected
contour
safety contour becomes unavailable on
Monitoring/Safety Alerts
these charts
Sounder
The current depth from the echo
depth
sounder is smaller than the set value
0–999 m
Warning
Set by the operator.
Monitoring/Navigational
Alerts
The rest of alerts are triggered off immediately upon the occurrence of an event.
Main Alerts Generation Principles
Safety Alerts
Navigation in the areas crowded with dangers to navigation requires permanent monitoring. With this aim in
view, the ECDIS task implements functions for setting and monitoring safe navigation parameters on vector
electronic charts.
Chart objects are identified by the ECDIS task as dangers to navigation by certain parameters. In the ECDIS
task, such parameters are referred to as safety parameters and are set by the operator:
l
Safety depth – mariner-defined depth to emphasize soundings on the display equal to or less than this
value. By default, the Safety depth is set at 30 m. A depth equal to or less than the Safety depth is
highlighted on the ECDIS task screen in bold type when the display of spot soundings is turned on:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Main Alerts Generation Principles
l
107
Safety contour - mariner-selected contour to distinguish on the display between safe and unsafe water. In
the checking of an area delimited with the Safety frame, this contour serves as a criterion for classifying
the detected depth as a danger to navigation.By default, the Safety contour is set at 30 m. The safety
contour is highlighted on the ECDIS task screen with a bold line:
If, with a change of chart set under the ship position, the previously selected safety contour becomes
unavailable, Default Safety Contour indication is generated. In this case, the safety contour is automatically set
as equal to a deeper available depth contour.
Attention! If the depth contour specified by the user is not digitised on the chart, the next deeper digitised
contour available on the chart will be accepted as the safety contour.
Safety alerts are set on the Safety Alerts page of the Monitoring panel.
The main means of determining the safety alerts operation is the Safety Frame. Dangerous objects turning
up within the Safety Frame cause generation of a relevant alert.
The Safety Frame is a rectangle, the user setting position of its sides relative to the ship.
The Safety Frame is oriented along the COG. The Safety Frame size in front of the ship symbol is determined
by the distance traveled by the ship in the COG direction at the current SOG in the time set by the user in the
Ahead box. This time can be set within the range of 1 to 20 minutes. The Safety Frame dimensions set in the
Port and Starboard boxes (from 0.01 to 4.0 NM) are counted from the CCRP in the directions perpendicular to
the COG-SOG vector.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
108
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The check of charts consists in the search for the objects identified as a danger to navigation. For the alert to
be generated at the time when the danger to navigation turns up within the Safety frame, as well as when it
crosses safety contour or area type objects, the largest scale charts available under the ship position are
used.
The alerts are generated for the following chart objects:
l
Dangers to navigation if Nav.hazard checkbox is checked. In this case, the Navigational hazard caution is
generated:
On the Chart panel only at station with the status MASTER (if Highlight Danger checkbox is checked on the
Safety Alerts page of the Monitoring panel) the navigation danger will be indicated by highlighting in the
following form:
Navigational dangers include the following objects:
o
Beacons;
o
Buoys;
o
Bridges;
o
Overhead cables;
o
Pipelines;
o
Mechanical apparatus for moving bulk material or people;
o
The equipment or structure used to secure a vessel;
o
Marine farm/culture; obstruction;
o
Areas of ice over land or water;
o
Boats-like structure used instead of a light buoys;
o
Distinctively marked vessels anchored or moored at a charted points, to serve as an aid to navigation;
o
Maritime areas enclosed with connected floating timbers used as a staging areas for sawn logs;
o
Constructions to dam oil flow on water;
o
Long heavy timbers or sections of steel, wood, concrete, etc.. forced into the earth which may serve as
a support for a pier, or a free standing pole within a marine environment;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Main Alerts Generation Principles
l
109
o
Vertical constructions consisting, for example, of a steel framework or pre-stressed concrete to carr y
cables, a bridge, etc;
o
Obstructions that hinders or prevents movement, particularly anything that endangers or prevents
passage of a vessel
o
Concreted mass of stony material or coral which dries, is awash or is below the water surface;
o
Wrecks;
o
Updating objects which have “Danger” and/or “Depth” attributes;
o
Symbols of NAVTEX messages with “Danger” attribute.
Safety contours if Safety contour checkbox is checked (determined by the value of the operator set safety
contour). In this case, the Crossing safety contour alarm is generated:
On the Chart panel only at station with the status MASTER (if Danger highlight checkbox is checked on the
Safety Alerts page of the Monitoring panel) the safety contour will be indicated by highlighting in the
following form:
l
Area type objects if the appropriate checkboxes are checked in Area alerts group on Safety Alerts page of
Monitoring panel.
The list of objects is divided into two groups:
o
IMO areas are a group of main areas tracked in accordance with IEC-61174 standard. In this case, the
following cautions are generated:
— Anchorage area;
— Offshore prod. area;
— Areas to be avoided;
— PSSA;
— Caution area;
— Restricted area;
— Inshore traffic zone;
— Seaplane landing ;
— Marine Farm Culture;
— Submarine transit ;
— Military area;
— Traff. separ. zone.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
110
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
o
Additional areas are a group of additional areas which alerts are implemented for. In this case, the
following cautions are generated:
— Anchoring prohibited;
— Int. mar. boundary;
— Cable area;
— Harbour limit;
— Cargo transship area;
— Nature reserve;
— Danger area;
— Pipeline area ;
— Deepwater route;
— Prohibited area ;
— Dredged area;
— Precautionary area ;
— Dumping ground;
— Quarantine anchorage ;
— ESSA;
— Recommended traffic lane ;
— Excl. econ. zone;
— Spoil ground ;
— Explosives dumping;
— Swept area ;
— Fairway;
— Territorial sea base;
— Fishery zone;
— Territorial sea ;
— Fishing ground;
— Traffic SS crossing;
— Fishing prohibited;
— Traffic SS roundabout ;
— Ice area;
— Two way traffic route ;
— Incineration area;
— Unsurveyed area.
If the ship crosses several area type objects at a time, they are aggregated in Area with special conditions
group:
A press on the "+" sign opens a full list of generated cautions:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Main Alerts Generation Principles
111
On the Chart panel only at station with the status MASTER (if Highlight Danger checkbox is checked on the
Safety Alerts page of the Monitoring panel) the area type objects will be indicated by highlighting in the
following form:
Charts are checked for the presence of dangers in two cases: during the route planning and sailing in the
monitoring mode.
The “Best scale” criterion is used for chart analysis:
l
l
In the monitoring mode, the NS4000 extracts objects from the best scale chart under the ship position. If
the actually loaded chart is not the best scale one, objects from the loaded chart are extracted in addition
to the object from the best scale chart;
In the route check mode, the NS4000 selects only the best scale charts of every format whose data
coverage falls under the route. Objects from the selected charts are extracted for warning the user.
For each route leg select the maximum scale charts which this leg passes through, and the check is made on
these charts as, e.g., shown in the figure below.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
112
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
E.g., for a check of the WP18-WP19 leg, charts 04, 03, 02, 04, 01 will successively be used:
Point
Available charts
Scale
Format
Result
1
01
1:90.000
TRS
01
2
01
1:90.000
TRS
04
04
1:90.000
ENC
01
1:90.000
TRS
03
1:45.000
TRS
04
1:90.000
ENC
01
1:90.000
TRS
02
1:45.000
TRS
04
1:90.000
ENC
01
1:90.000
TRS
04
1:90.000
ENC
01
1:90.000
TRS
3
4
5
6
03
02
04
01
Navigational Alerts
Enroute, the own ship position should be taken into account as accurately and reliably as possible.
Navigational alerts are intended for alerting the navigator to the change of own ship and chart information
display conditions:
l
l
If the user-set value of difference between the positioning systems’ readings is exceeded, provided the
Prim/Sec diverged checkbox is checked, the Position monitor caution is generated;
If the set value of difference between the gyros’ readings is exceeded, the Heading Monitor caution is
generated;
Note: The Heading Monitor alert operation is activated, and the trigger-off limit is set by the service engineer at
the installation stage (see document document Multi-Functional Display. (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I ,
Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration , paragraph MFD Settings, item 2). On the Navigational Alerts page of the
Monitoring panel, information is provided for reference purposes
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Main Alerts Generation Principles
l
l
l
113
If there is no data from even one of the gyros used for the Heading Monitor caution generation, the HDG
Monitor impossible caution is generated;
If the ship sails beyond the chart boundary, with chart autoload mode off, Off chart warning is generated;
Sounder depth is a set minimum depth, which determines the depth compared to the sounder readings.
As a depth smaller than the set value is received from the sounder, the Sounder depth warning is
generated:
l
If anchor points 1 or 2 gets beyond the user-set 1 or 2 rings, with the Outside anchorage area 1 or Outside
anchorage area 2 warning is generated (checkboxes in Alertcolumn should be checked).
Attention! If Outside anchorage area 1/2 warning is not acknowledged by the operator within 30 seconds of
its appearance, it turns to the Outside anchorage area 1/2 alarm. Further, if this alarm is not acknowledged
within 30 seconds either, the Backup Navigator alarm is triggered off. Such alarm message is normally distributed
via ship’s alert network for backup officers.
Anchor points 1 and 2 are set on the ship contour during the installation in the System Configuration
utility. (see document Multi-Functional Display. (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section MFD
Configuration , paragraph MFD Settings):
The centre of the anchor watch ring is set automatically at the moment of pressing the Down button, and
corresponds to the anchor point position at this time. With the use of the By Cursor button, the user
him/herself sets the anchor watch ring centre with the cursor on the Chart panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
114
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
As this is done, the Chart panel shows bearing and distance from the ship’s bow/stern to the relevant
referencing point.
l
Warning connected with the system of coordinates used in the MFD, also belong to this group. The ECDIS
task uses the system of coordinates based on WGS-84 datum. Information on the datum set in the PS
receiver is contained in DTM sentence. If DTM sentence is not transmitted from the PS receiver, the ECDIS
task assumes that the system of coordinates set in the PS receiver as WGS-84. In this case and if some
other system of coordinates is set in the PS receiver, Diff. geodetic datum warning is generated, warning
the operator that the received coordinates do not comply with WGS-84 system of coordinates.
Route Alerts
The Route alerts notify about the ship’s exit beyond the boundary of set limitations during the sailing along
the route. The alert is generated according to the following principles:
l
l
l
l
l
As the ship deviates from the plotted ship course to a value exceeding the setting in the Off leg course
input window, the Course difference caution is generated;
As the ship deviation from the route leg exceeds the set value,the Off-Track alarm is generated;
If the ship schedule is not observed (the ship is ahead of or behind the schedule), Ahead the schedule or
Behind the schedule warning is generated;
As the ship approaches the next WPT, the Approach to critical point warning is generated upon approach
to the WOL at the advance time (or distance) set by the operator;
As the ship passes the last WPT of the monitored route, the End of track warning is generated.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Main Alerts Generation Principles
115
The aforementioned alerts are enabled and their parameters are set on the Route Monitoring page of
Monitoring panel.
Target/Radar Alerts
Target/Radar alerts about events connected with targets and sensors, which transmit target information to
the MFD:
l
When targets are handled the principal safety parameters are CPA and TCPA:
Note: If the CPA/TCPA values for a target are supplied from the TTM/TTD message, it is these values which will be
compared to the user-set criteria for the CPA/TCPA alarm generation. Otherwise the system will itself compute
these values for the target.
The set CPA value determines the distance of the closest point of approach to the targets whose
information is supplied by the sensors, whereas TCPA stands for time to the closest point of approach. A
target is dangerous when both, its CPA and TCPA values are smaller than CPA and TCPA values set in Alarm
group of Targets panel. In this case the Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm is generated (Wxx - WS name and Tgt ID
- AIS or ARPA target ID).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
116
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
If this alarm is simultaneously generated for several targets, they are aggregated in a CPA/TCPA group:
The symbol of a dangerous target is a red coloured circle:
The symbol of the dangerous target is flashing until CPA/TCPA alarm is acknowledged. For the AIS targets,
no CPA/TCPA calculations are made in the absence of the COG or SOG.
Vectors of dangerous targets are shown on ECDIS task screen in the red colour. Targets’ tracks tracked
and displayed on the ECDIS task screen are automatically saved (archived) to day files.
l
If the number of targets exceeds 95% of the maximum number of targets,the following cautions are
generated:
o
95% AIS capacity (973 AIS targets);
o
95% ARPA capacity (76 ARPA targets).
If this alert is simultaneously actuated for the AIS and ARPA targets, they are aggregated in a 95% TGT
capacity exceeded group:
l
If the number of targets exceeds the maximum number of targets, the following warnings are generated:
o
AIS capacity exceeded (1024 AIS targets);
o
ARPA capacity exceeded (80 ARPA Targets).
If this alert is simultaneously actuated for the AIS and ARPA targets, they are aggregated in a Target
capacity exceeded group:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Main Alerts Generation Principles
l
117
With a loss of a target the Wxx Lost Tgt ID warning is generated (Wxx - WS name and Tgt ID - AIS or ARPA
target ID).
If this alarm is simultaneously generated for several targets, they are aggregated in Lost target group:
l
With the appearance of a target in the Guard Zone, the fthe Wxx GZ Tgt ID warning is generated (Wxx WS name and Tgt ID - AIS or ARPA target ID).:
If this alarm is simultaneously generated for several targets, they are aggregated in Guard zone group:
Sensors Alarms
Sensors alerts about absence of data from external sensors, which are selected as sources of the data. These
alerts are not generated unless the connected sensors have been selected by the user for the information
sources. The alerts of this group are generated when there is not data from the sensor (sensor failure or
connecting cable broken) or when sentences received from sensors have empty fields which should have
contained necessary data, or contain unreliable data (see also Annex D):
l
l
Warnings for a position sensor selected for the primary positioning (if there are more than one of such
warnings, they are aggregated in a Position failure group):
o
POS: no data ;
o
POS: no input;
o
POS: COG/SOG no data .
Cautions for a position sensor selected for the secondary positioning (if there are more than one of such
warnings, they are aggregated in a Position failure group):
o
POS: no data ;
o
POS: no input;
o
POS: COG/SOG no data .
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
118
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
l
l
Warnings for sensors selected for the main ones (if there are more than one of such warnings, they are
aggregated in a Sensor failure group):
o
AIS: no input;
o
DLOG: no input;
o
Name: Heading failure;
o
DLOG STW: no data ;
o
Name: Bearing failure;
o
GYRO: no data ;
o
Name: Connection failure;
o
GYRO: no input;
o
Name: Video failure;
o
LOG: no data ;
o
Name: Scanner control;
o
LOG: no input.
o
Name: Video timeout;
(where Name - scanner name)
Cautions for sensors selected for supplementary ones (including the EPFS), (if there are more than one of
such cautions, they are aggregated in a AUX Sensor failure group):
o
DLOG №: SOG no data ;
o
LOG №: no data ;
o
DLOG №: STW no data ;
o
LOG №: no input;
o
DLOG №: no input ;
o
POS № COG/SOG no data ;
o
GYRO №: no data ;
o
POS №: no input ;
o
GYRO №: no input;
o
POS №: no data .
Cautions for the auxiliary sensors not directly related to the navigation (if there are more than one of such
cautions, they are aggregated in a AUX Sensor failure group):
o
ROT: no data ;
o
WIND: no data ;
o
ROT: no input;
o
WIND: no input;
o
SOUNDER: no data ;
o
MAG №: no data ;
o
SOUNDER: no input;
o
MAG №: no input ;
o
TEMPERATURE: no data ;
o
UTC: no input;
o
TEMPERATURE: no input;
o
UTC: no data .
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 4. Alert Management • Main Alerts Generation Principles
l
119
Should the primary data source fail, the backup data source is used automatically, in this case the
following cautions are generated:
o
Position Fallback;
o
Heading Fallback;
o
Speed Fallback.
If this alert is simultaneously generated for several sources, they are aggregated in a Fallback group:
Hardware Alerts
Hardware alerts are generated by faults in the operation of hardware, which the system consists of. In this
case the following alerts are generated:
System malfunction
l
In the case of faulty or absence of connection with the display, or incorrect settings in the System
Configuration utility, Wxx Display failure warning is triggered off, where Wxx is WS name.
Note: If there is no information on MFD display, the triggering off of this alert is indicated by the flashing of
<Alarm> key on ES6 keyboard;
l
In the case of broken connection with ES6 keyboard, or incorrect settings in the System Configuration
utility, Wxx Keyboard failurewarning is triggered off, , where Wxx is WS name;
If the aforementioned alerts are generated simultaneously, they are aggregated in a System malfunction
group.
l
In the case of broken connection with VDR, VDR connection lost caution is generated;
l
In the case of broken connection with BAM, BAM connection lost caution is generated;
l
If the UPS works from the internal emergency batteries, Wxx: Power supply fail warning is generated;
l
If the UPS batteries discharged to 20%, Wxx: Low Battery warning is generated.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5.
Routes and Schedules
This chapter provides a description of the route planning and schedule generation
principles.
Route Planning
Route Elements
Route File Format
Route Generation
Route Editing
Schedule Calculations
Schedule Generation and Editing
Schedule Calculations Taking into Account the Effect of Currents
Check of the Schedule
Route Checking
Dangers Taken into Account During the Route Check
Quick Dangers Review
Editing of a Previously Created Route
Work with Multiroutes
SAR Routes
Route Monitoring
Sailing Along the Route
Obtaining of Information on the Voyage Schedule
122
122
124
125
126
126
126
128
128
129
129
129
130
131
132
135
135
137
122
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Route Planning
Attention! WGS-84 datum is used for the calculations of all the ranges and directions.
Route Elements
Data associated with routes and schedules in the ECDIS task are presented in a graphic and tabular form:
The route is displayed by superimposing a transparent layer containing route elements only, on the ECDIS
task screen chart information. The following route elements are displayed on the ECDIS task Chart panel:
l
l
Waypoints – display of points in the set coordinates (Lat/Lon) with numbers (WPT) or names (Name);
Route legs – straight (RL) or arch shaped (GC) legs connecting waypoints successively and having certain
length (Distance) and direction (Course). The aggregate length of the route legs represents the route
distance (Total Distance);
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • Route Planning
l
l
l
123
XTD – lines parallel to the route line and limiting the set deviation (X PORT/X STBD) to the left and to the
right of the route leg. These lines are used for the timely alerting about the exit beyond these limits in the
navigation mode. The portside and starboard limits of the X PORT/X STBD are shown in the red and green
colours respectively;
WOL – WOL is a line upon crossing which it is necessary to angle the rudder to turn in to the next leg of
the route;
Turn radius arch – an arch of the set radius (Turn Radius) circle inscribed in the angle between two adjacent
route legs (used for the display of the approximate ship track on a turning circle).
Attention! Distance, Course and Total Distance route elements are calculated automatically and cannot be
changed by the operator in the table.
The plotted route is shown on the ECDIS task screen in the form of rectilinear (route legs) and curvilinear
(turn radius arcs) segments.
Calculations of the route elements are made in the following manner:
l
l
the inscribed circle’s tangent point on the current and next route legs is found. The radius of the circle is
equal to the set turn radius. This point is the reference for further calculations;
the lead distance (F distance) set on General page of Config panel is laid from turn origin point in the
direction of the current route leg start;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
124
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
the line which passes through the route leg in the F dist point is referred to as the WOL. The WOL is
generally parallel to the next route leg. The exception is formed by an acute (< 30°) or obtuse (> 150°) angle
between the adjacent route legs, as well as by the route’s end point. In the former case, the WOL will
have a 30° tilt regardless of the angle value, and in the latter case, it will be perpendicular to the leg.
< 30°
> 150°
In the case of the route’s end point, the WOL is perpendicular to the last leg and passes through the WPT
itself.
The WOL length is set so that it is 1 NM. If the scale is set at 1:100 000 or less, the WOL is equal to 20 mm.
Route File Format
Route data is stored in a file with *.rt3 extension. A single file contains individual schedule and route which
is described by WPT’s with the following characteristics:
l
WPT number (the first waypoint has 0 for number);
l
WPT name;
l
Coordinates;
l
Leg form – GC or RL;
l
XTD;
l
Turn radius arch parameters.
The Navi-Sailor versions (NS 2400 and NS 2500) used *.rte route format, whilst MFD operates with *.rt3
format only. To convert route files from the old format to a new one, a special converter is built into the Data
Tool utility. In addition, this converter allows performing operations on files containing route data (copying
and deleting).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • Route Planning
125
Route Generation
The route generation principle consists in setting WPT coordinates and the type of sailing between them: RL
or GC. This data is used for the automatic calculations of:
l
l
Distance between WPTs, distance from the start of the route to each point and total distance of the entire
route;
Initial direction of the general course from each WPT to the next one.
This principle contains the minimum and necessary amount of data for the route generation. In addition,
assigned to each WPT is its own name. It is worthwhile to use this kind of functionality for a brief
characteristic of a certain WPT.
There are two ways to generate routes:
l
Graphically. When this method is used, WPTs are plotted on the electronic chart with the graphic cursor.
Such cursor is handy for a swift change of sailing area display. The disadvantage of this method consists in
that it does not allow the type of sailing to be determined (RL/GC), or additional parameters (XTD
and Turns radius) to be entered for the display of appropriate route elements.
Cursor method which is a variation of the graphic method, allows each successive WPT to be entered in
the cursor information window by the coordinates, or bearing and distance from the previous point. This
method allows XTD to be entered for the route leg which is being plotted.
l
In a tabular form. This method is based on the manual input of all the route parameters in special tables
on Route Planning panel. The drawback is that it does not allow viewing the areas where the route is
plotted beyond the ECDIS task screen, which may cause errors.
For the operator’s convenience, there is a facility for the automatic change of methods in the ECDIS task. In
this case, if the cursor is within the limits of the chart screen, it is assigned the former method function, whilst
a double click on the cell allows data to be edited in a table.
Route generation procedures (with the assigning of a new name):
l
Generation of a new route: a route is first created and then saved via Save function;
l
Generation by editing an available route: an existing route is edited and then saved via Save function;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
126
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
l
l
Generation by the automatic merging of several routes: the route which is being edited is linked
automatically, by using link to function an already existing route selected from the list, and is then saved
by using Save function under the existing or a new name;
Generation of a reverse route through the automatic re-calculations: an existing route is selected and recalculated automatically by using Reverse function to obtain the reverse route; it is then saved via Save
function under the existing or a new name;
Semi-automatic generation of a new route by the types recommended by IAMSAR manual.
Route Editing
An existing route can be edited by using a graphic or tabular method with the limitations inherent in the
route generation methods.
The graphic editing allows WPTs to be created, moved and deleted. When points connecting leg with
different configurations are created and deleted, the re-drawing is made according to the following principle:
Attention! When editing the route, you should remember that changes in the route parameters cause all the
schedules generated on the basis of this route to be deleted.
Schedule Calculations
Schedule Generation and Editing
A schedule is a pre-calculated ship sailing timetable based on the created route. There are the following
schedule elements:
l
ETD – Estimated Time of Departure;
l
ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival;
l
Stay – time of stay in a WPT;
l
Time Zone – it is set as required for each WPT which the ETA should be calculated for, the time zone of the
place where this WPT is located, taken into account; for the start point of the route, the time zone should
also be set;
l
Speed – speed on a route leg;
l
TTG – calculated time enroute from one waypoint to another (Time To Go);
l
Total Time – pre-calculated total time of proceeding by the schedule (Stay time not taken into account);
l
Average Speed – pre-calculated total time of proceeding by the schedule.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • Schedule Calculations
127
Attention! TTG, Total Time and Average Speed schedule elements are calculated automatically and cannot
be changed by an operator in the table.
Depending on the initial data, three types of schedule for the motion along the route can be created (see
picture, entered parameters are shown in black colour, calculated parameters is shown in grey colour):
l
l
l
ETD and speed on each route leg (Speed); in this case TTG, Total Time and ETA are calculated:
ETD and ETA (+Stay) in the route start and end points. TTG, Total Time and Speed (Average Speed) are
calculated:
Combined schedule – with the set speeds (Speed) and ETA in the selected intermediate WPT’s:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
128
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Schedule Calculations Taking into Account the Effect of Currents
The schedule calculations can take into account the time of stay in a WPT (Stay), change of time zones (Time
Zone) and environmental factors effect on the basis of the MFD navigational databases. Such environmental
factors include:
l
Tidal currents;
l
Surface currents.
Calculations of the current effect are carried out automatically according to the following pattern:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
The current effect time is calculated from the ETD with 30 min discretion; calculations of the resulting
current vector are made in the waypoint spaces at a distance which the ship will be covering every 30 min
if proceeding at a set speed ( Speed);
An intermediate route point corresponding to such discretion is determined (part of the route in case of
the set ETA, or calculated distance in case of the set Speed);
Current vector in the given point is determined by the interpolation of the closest vectors in the points
where the required current is determined from the database, 30 min resulting current vector is calculated;
Projection of the resulting currents vector on the route leg is calculated;
The next intermediate point is calculated (for the known speed, the current taken into account) and the
process is repeated;
The obtained data is summed up and, depending on what is set: Speed or ETA , the unknown value is
calculated for the route leg;
For the ETA calculations for the final WPT, time on each route leg is summed up, stays in WPT’s and
change of time zones taken into account.
Several schedules can be calculated for a single route as required, taking into account drift and currents or
none at all. In this case, each schedule is required to be saved under its own name.
Check of the Schedule
A check of the generated or edited schedule for the correctness of parameters is made automatically. If an
error is identified (e.g., ETA time is larger than the ETD), the probable incorrect parameter will be specified in
the message about an error in the schedule calculations.
In addition, before saving a schedule, it is necessary to ascertain that all the conditions for the schedule
monitoring enroute in the navigation mode will be fulfilled:
l
The route which the schedule is based on, has been saved;
l
The required voyage schedule has been generated;
l
The time will agree with the turn-on criterion, i.e. it will be within [t ; t ] ±10% interval (where t is ETD
1 2
1
from the start WPT; t is ETA in the last WPT). This condition may be noted in a different way:
2
[ETD - (ETA - ETD)/10] < [ETD + Total_Time + Stay] < [ETA + (ETA - ETD)/10].
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • Route Checking
129
Route Checking
As the route is planned, especially in case of a large route leg, it is necessary to ascertain that the route has not
been plotted through the dangers to navigation. To facilitate the route planning taking into account dangers to
navigation encountered on the vector charts, the ECDIS task implements the mode enabling the check
of a route for the availability of dangers to navigation, with a capability to edit the route at the same time.
Dangers Taken into Account During the Route Check
The charts under the route are checked taking into account "Best scale" criterion (see Chapter 4, section Main
Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts).
The route is checked for the presence of the following groups of dangers to navigation within the zone limited
by the XTD (set on Route Planning panel):
l
Safety parameters set and activated on Safety Alerts page of Monitoring panel:
o
l
l
Safety contour.
Line and area type objects activated on Safety Alerts page of Monitoring panel:
o
IMO Areas;
o
Additional Areas.
Updating objects with “Danger” and/or “Depth” attributes (charts should be loaded in Manual Correction
panel);
If the check of a route leg taking into account the set XTD has revealed some of the aforementioned dangers
to navigation, Check page of Route Planning panel displays a message containing the following information:
l
Number of the danger to navigation in the order starting from the beginning of the checked route segment;
l
Total number of dangers detected on the checked route leg;
l
Route leg on which the danger to navigation has been detected (start WPT – end WPT);
l
Number of the chart where the danger was detected (updating objects are not displayed);
l
Type of the detected danger to navigation or the word Danger if the type is not identified;
l
Source of the danger (for the updating objects and NAVTEX message symbols).
Quick Dangers Review
After the dangers to navigation have been detected on the set route segment, they can be promptly viewed.
The detected dangers are displayed on the Chart panel by pressing
button. As this is done, the danger is
displayed on the chart where it was detected. The chart is loaded on the original scale. The danger to navigation
is shown as this described in Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts.
To view successively the dangers to navigation detected on the checked route segment, use
buttons.
All the other functions of Route Planning panel are disabled until
and
button is pressed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
130
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Editing of a Previously Created Route
To check and edit a previously created route, load it in Route Planningpanel.
The check of a previously created route is made by pressing
button in Check Route group. The check
process is shown by the Progress bar and can be interrupted at any moment by pressing
button.
After the end of the check, Check Routepage displays a message about the identified dangers to navigation, or
to the effect that no dangers have been detected:
To edit a previously created route, it is necessary to press WPT Editor button of Route Planning panel.
During the route editing, its check for the availability of dangers to navigation is made according to the
following rules:
l
l
l
The start or end WPT has been moved or added. After the change of the WPT position, two legs after it
will be automatically checked for dangerous to navigation.:
A WPT in the middle of the route has been moved or added. After the change of the WPT position, two
legs before the changed point and two legs after it will be automatically checked.
XTD has been changed without change in the WPT position. The check which carried out takes into
account the altered XTD.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • Work with Multiroutes
131
If there are no dangers to navigation on the route, Check Route group will display an appropriate message.
To accept the route checking results and exit from the checking mode press
the button. The ”checked”
attribute will be assigned to the route. Check results will be entered in the voyage plan, the following window
will open up.
Work with Multiroutes
During the ECDIS task operation, as many routes can be created as the user may require.
Depending on their purpose, the routes created by the user can be displayed on the Chart panel in the
following way:
l
l
l
Brown colour – all the routes loaded in Route Planning panel;
Blue colour – one of the routes loaded in Route Planning panel, which is currently active. To activate the
route, press the button with its name. As this is done, its data displayed in the table, and the route can be
edited. For each route, you can select one of associated (created) schedules whose data will appear
in the relevant table columns;
Red colour – one of the routes created in Route Planning panel, which is currently being monitored. It is
used for the navigation mode (permanent monitoring of the ship position) and is loaded in this mode on
Route Monitoring page of Monitoring panel. You can unload this route as required and load any other
route for the Navigation mode. In the course of the voyage, the user can edit the monitored route on
Route Planning panel.
The aforementioned routes can be simultaneously displayed on the ECDIS task screen.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
132
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
SAR Routes
With the use of SAR function, routes are generated in accordance with patterns recommended for search and
rescue (SAR routes):
l
Expanding Square:
To generate this SAR pattern, it is necessary to enter additional data on the Number of Legs in the pattern
and length of the initial WPT1-WPT2 segment (Length of Starting Leg).
l
Parallel Track/Creeping Line:
To generate this search pattern, it is necessary to enter some additional data: on the Number of Legs in the
pattern, each Leg Length and distance between the adjacent legs (Track Spacing).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • SAR Routes
l
133
Sector Search:
To generate this search pattern, it is necessary to enter some additional data on the Number of Sectors,
Search Radius and angle between the adjacent sectors (Turn Angle).
l
Track Line Search;
Track Line Search, return (TSR) Track Line Search, non return (TSN)
To generate this search pattern, it is necessary to enter some additional data: on each Leg Length and
distance between the adjacent legs (Track Spacing).
It is possible to select two search pattern types:
l
o
Search may be along one side of track line and return in the opposite direction on the other side (TSR);
o
Search may be along the intended track and once on each side, then search facility continues on its
way and does not return (TSN).
Creeping Line Search;
Ship SAR route
Aircraft SAR route
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
134
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
This search pattern type is used in the joint ship/aircraft rescue operations. To generate this search
pattern, it is necessary to enter some additional data: on the Number of Legs in the pattern, each Leg
Length and distance between the adjacent legs (Track Spacing). Ship speed varies according to the speed of
aircraft and the size of pattern. The relationship among the speed of surface facility, aircraft’s speed, the
track spacing and the length of the search legs is defined by
the following equation:
V = (S×V ) / (L+S)
s
a
Where V is the speed of the surface facility in knots, S is the track spacing in nautical miles, V is the
s
a
aircraft’s true air speed in knots, and L is the length of the aircraft’s leg in nautical miles.
Before the start of route generation, it is necessary to specify the initial points:
l
l
Operation start point (Own Ship Coordinates) – this is a point where the course is expected to be altered for
proceeding to the search area. This point is the start of the generated route. Coordinates are set manually
or automatically. If Current function is enabled, the start point will automatically acquire the own ship
coordinate values (from the ECDIS task) and will be automatically updated until the route is saved;
Search start point (Commence Search Point) – it is from this point (WPT1) that the ship starts proceeding
along the selected Search Pattern.
Input of values in Drift and Set fields is required if there is a constant considerable current in the area, and this
is known to the operator. If speed is taken into account (expected Speed during the search operations), this
will enable calculations of the search pattern over the ground so that the pattern will retain its recommended
form relative to the water.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • Route Monitoring
135
Route Monitoring
Sailing Along the Route
The route loaded for sailing is displayed on the ECDIS task screen in red colour.
An attempt to load a route, whose elements do not correspond to the set values in the monitoring mode,
generates a relevant warning.
From the moment of route loading, the system starts generating data on the mutual positions of the route
elements and the ship, whilst from the time of the schedule count off (turn ON criterion) the ship’s progress
relative to the schedule is calculated.
Information on the sailing along the route is shown in Route Data and Schedule pages on Route data display
of Control Panel.
For the operator’s convenience, the following parameters of the ship’s motion along the route can be set
and changed during the voyage on Route Monitoring page, in Waypoints group:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
136
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
Next waypoint – the mode of automatic (successive) or manual change of WPT’s. In case of the manual
mode, a window for the input of the next WPT number is activated. The principle underlying such change
is shown in the drawing below:
Here, in the manual mode, WPT4 is set as the next WPT instead of WPT2 as might be expected. In this
case, the ECDIS task takes into account parameters set for the route leg between WPT3 and WPT4.
Accordingly, calculations are made for the mutual positions of the ship and this leg elements. The
schedule is thus re-calculated: the actual time is taken into account as in case of proceeding along WPT3–
WPT4 leg.
It is advisable to use this functionality instead of route editing functions (deleting of a point), as in the
case the schedule is retained.
l
l
The current WPT is changed as the WOL line is crossed. If the ship is beyond the XTD and does not cross
the WOL, the current WPT is changed when the ship crosses the bisector of the angle between the
adjacent legs of the monitored route:
Radius – (turn radius arc) arc of the turning circle planned for the turn in the given WPT with a set radius.
Such arc is part of a circle inscribed in the angle formed by the adjacent route legs as shown in the
drawing:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 5. Routes and Schedules • Route Monitoring
137
Obtaining of Information on the Voyage Schedule
During the sailing along the route, ETA and TTG calculations for any WPT can be made by using a voyage
calculator in Data and Schedule pages of Route Data display.
There may be two versions of the ETA and TTG calculations:
l
The voyage schedule is loaded on Route Monitoring page of Monitoring panel.
In this case, TTG to the next WPT (specified in Next waypoint line) is calculated from the following formula:
TTG = DTW / SOG(SMG)
A thus calculated TTG is summed with TTG’s of other route legs from the loaded schedule up to the WPT
selected in the voyage calculator.
ETA is calculated as a sum of the current time and of all the TTG’s to the selected WPT:
l
The voyage schedule is not loaded. TTG is calculated as a sum of DTW and all the route legs up to the
selected WPT, divided by SOG (SMG):
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
138
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
There may be two versions of the PTA and STG calculations:
l
l
The voyage schedule is loaded on Route Monitoring page of Monitoring panel.By default, or after a press on
Schedule button of Schedule panel of Route data display, the closest WPT which ETA is set for is selected.
PTA for this point is taken from the loaded schedule. If ETA has not been set, PTA to the end point is
taken. In this case, STG will be equal to the speed at which the ship should proceed to the next WPT
in order to reach it on schedule. The point, which ETA is calculated for, is sailed to according to the loaded
schedule. As the PTA is changed, STG will be equal to the speed at which the ship should proceed to the
next WPT in order to arrive in the point which ETA is calculated for, with the changed PTA taken into
account;
The schedule is not loaded. By default, the last WPT is taken. In this case, "Click to enter" message
appears in PTA line. After the input of PTA, STG line shows the speed at which the ship should proceed
along the entire route in order to arrive in the set WPT at the time (PTA). If the speed is set in STG line, PTA
line displays the time of arrival in the set WPT if proceeded to at the set speed (STG).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6.
Logging Functions
This chapter provides a description of principles underlying the maintaining of the
electronic logbook, archiving and playback of the own ship and target track
information, and of the radar picture.
General
Ship Logbook
Ship Logbook Formation Principles
Making Corrections and Safety
Archiving Ship Logbook
Electronic System Logbook
Electronic System Logbook Formation Principles
Contents of the Electronic Ship Log
Display of Electronic Ship Logbook in Data Tool Utility
Own Ship Track
Display of the Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task
Track Elements
Display of Own Ship Track in Data Tool Utility
Target Data
Archiving of Target Tracks in the MFD
File Handling in Data Tool Utility
Radar Overlay
Archiving of Radar Picture in MFD
File Handling in Data Tool Utility
Log Book, Route Screen Shots Printout
Graphic Screen Copy
Printing Out of Information
140
143
143
147
152
153
153
154
156
157
157
158
158
158
158
159
159
159
159
160
160
160
140
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
General
The data obtained as result of the MFD operation and saved for the further viewing, enables situations,
which occurred earlier during the voyage, to be archived and reconstructed.
The following functionality is used for the recording and display of archived data on the ECDIS task operation
results:
l
Ship logbook;
l
Electronic system logbook;
l
Ownship track;
l
Target tracks;
l
Radar overlay.
The archived system parameters are saved onto the computer hard disk and can be available for the viewing
in the ECDIS task, Play Back or Data Tool utilities. The data is saved locally on each WS individually, and is not
synchronized. The table shows the group of data archived by the ECDIS task.
Archived parameters
Archiving
discretion
Measurement
units
Precision
Detailed track, if it is turned on in the System Configuration utility.
1 sec
Degrees,
0_
0.000000
Coordinates from the primary positioning systems
Coordinates from the primary positioning system
minutes
10 sec
Degrees,
minutes
Coordinates from the secondary positioning system
10 sec
Degrees,
0_
0.000000
minutes
0_
0.000000
COG
10 sec
Degrees
0.000
SOG
10 sec
Knots
0.000
HDG
10 sec
Degrees
0.000
STW
10 sec
Knots
0.000
Echosounder
10 or 20 sec1
Meters
0.0
Wind
10, 20, 30 or 60
Knots
0.000
sec1
Temperature
20, 30 or 60 sec1
Degrees
0.0
Targets (ARPA and AIS) pos. and their status (by CPA/TCPA
10, 20 or 60 sec1
Degrees,
0_
0.000000
parameter) and GZ
1– the record interval set by the service engineer during installation.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
minutes
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • General
Archived parameters
Archiving
discretion
Radar overlay
1–60 sec1
Route Monitoring Data (Monitoring rout name, monitoring WPT,
10 or 20 sec1
Measurement
units
141
Precision
XTD – Meters
0
XTD, WPT selection mode)
The size of archive files containing the logs, own ship track and target tracks, comes to about 50 MB a month.
The size of files with the recording of radar picture is about 1 GB a day; it should be noted that the time of
radar picture recording couldn’t exceed 5 days, whereupon the files are rewritten. Therefore, the maximum
HDD memory size for the storage of system archive information for 3 months, as per the IMO requirement, is
about 6 GB. This is commensurate with capabilities of computers required by the manufacturer for the
installation MFD program. To prevent overfilling of the hard disk, the System Configuration utility provides a
capability on the Tracks page to set the archive data storage time in days, whereupon the old data is deleted
and new information is recorded in its place.
In doing this, please note that its only the operating time of the station with the MFD installed which is taken
into account (i.e., files will start to be deleted if the MFD was not switched off during the set period).
The MFD data archiving capability by the aforementioned functions:
Archived parameters
Electronic ship logbook Own ship track Target tracks Radar picture
Primary Position
√
√
Secondary Position
√
√
COG
√
√
√
SOG
√
√
√
HDG
√
√
STW
√
√
Depth
√
√
Wind
√
√
Temperature
√
√
Targets position
√
√
Radar overlay
Route Monitoring Data √
√
√
1– the record interval set by the service engineer during installation.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
142
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The capability to display (in a graphic or text form) archived data in the ECDIS task and the Play Back and Data
Tools utilities by the functions:
l
T – text form;
l
G – graphic form.
Archived parameters
Electronic ship logbook Own ship track
Target tracks
Radar picture
ECDIS
PB
DT
ECDIS PB
DT
ECDIS PB
ECDIS PB
Primary Position
T
T
T
G
G
T
Secondary Position
T
T
T
G
T
COG
T
T
T
G
G
T
G
SOG
T
T
T
G
G
T
G
HDG
T
T
T
G
G
T
LOG
T
T
T
G
G
T
Depth
T
T
Wind
T
T
T
Temperature
T
T
T
Targets position
DT
G
G
Radar overlay
Route Monitoring Data T
DT
G
T
G
G
Principles underlying the saving and display of archived parameters and some other data are presented in
the utilities, in the description of relevant functions.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Ship Logbook
143
Ship Logbook
Ship Logbook Formation Principles
Voyage data is entered in the electronic standard form Ship Logbook meeting the requirements of IMO
Resolution A.916(22). The Ship Logbook is shown on the Ship Logbook page of the Logbook panel.
Ship Logbook is designed for recording events which occurred during the ECDIS task operation. The table is a
set of rows (events) and columns (event parameters). Events in the Ship Logbook are arranged
chronologically from the bottom to the top. Each event is associated with the following set of parameters:
l
Time Local – event date and time (local time is specified (+ Time Zone));
l
Event – event name;
l
LAT\LON – event latitude and longitude;
l
Source – sources of coordinates and the course, their number specified;
l
Chart Track – direction of the current monitored route leg;
l
GYRO (ERR) – own ship course from the gyro and gyro correction;
l
MAG (ERR) – own ship course from the magnetic compass and the magnetic compass correction;
l
Press – atmospheric pressure;
l
Temp. (air,sea) – ambient and water temperature;
l
Wind (dir,speed) – wind direction and velocity;
l
l
DIST (by LOG, SMG) – distance travelled since the beginning of the watch, data from the speed-throughwater and speed-over-ground sensors taken into account;
RPM – main engine rpm value.
If some sensor is not connected or its data is not available, the cells display the “***” symbol.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
144
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Events are entered in the log automatically, there is also a capability to enter the events manually by
selecting them from the available set of events in the Enter Event drop-down list.
There is a capability to select an event either from the Default list or from the Custom list. The customer can on
him/herself add events to the Custom list.
Log Book data with created by user events is readable on any other MFD application in Log Book table only.
Each event is recorded manually in the Ship Log Book required to enter a personal password, the rank and
name of the operator who entered the event.
For compiling a list of persons authorized to edit the log Logbook accounts tab of Logbook Settings page is used.
For each event, recorded automatically or manually, a full set of event parameters (if available) is entered in
the Ship Logbook. The table below shows a list of events and records made in the Comment field at the event
occurrence time.
Event
Ship logbook entry
Recording
mode
Position
Frequency selected
by user (5, 10,15,
20, 30 and 60 min)
Automatically Empty
Loading monitored
Loaded Route
Automatically Route “Name” loaded for monitoring.
Chart XXXXX
route
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Comments
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Ship Logbook
Event
Ship logbook entry
Recording
mode
Loading monitored
route checked for
safety
Loaded Route
Automatically Route "Name" checked for safety parameters
Unloading monitored
Loaded Route
Comments
(DD.MM.YYYY, HH:MM:SS) loaded for monitoring
Automatically Route “Name” unloaded from monitoring.
route
Man Over Board
Chart XXXXX
MOB
Automatically
l
l
l
Reception of a
145
Position Fix
Man over board – ON;
Position: <LAT – LONG>
Date: XX-XX-XX, Time: XX:XX:XX;
Man over board – MOB position changed by
operator;
Position: <LAT – LONG> Date:
XX-XX-XX, Time: XX:XX:XX;
Man over board – OFF
Automatically Position Fix accepted at XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX
manually obtained
Calculated position offset: X.X NM – XXX.X°
position
Calculated position: <LAT – LONG>
The following lines of position were used:
XX:XX:XX, BRG=XXX.X°, bound to
<LAT – LONG>
XX:XX:XX, BRG=XXX.X°, bound to
<LAT – LONG>
Primary position has not been updated
(in case of valid GPS)
Primary position has been updated
(in case of invalid GPS)
Change of a WPT on
New track
the monitored route
Exit beyond
Chart XXXXX
Out of XTD
the route
End of monitored
Automatically WPT “XX”, Route “Name”, New track XXX,X°
Automatically Out of XTD. Route “Name”, Leg WPT XX
to WPT XX
End of monitoring
Automatically End of monitoring route “Name”
Time zone changed
Automatically Time redacted “XX.XX hrs”
route
Change of Time zone
Time advanced “XX.XXhrs”
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
146
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Event
Ship logbook entry
Recording
mode
Comments
End of watch
End of watch
Automatically Chart under the ship “ XXXXX
Alarms: only common ones for the entire system at
the event occurrence time
Monitoring Route “Name”
Total watch distance
Total voyage distance
Watch officer: Rank, family name
Noon entry
Noon entry
Automatically Chart under the ship “ XXXXX
Alarms: only common ones for the entire system at
the event occurrence time Monitoring Route “Name”
Total daily distance (distance covered from 12 noon
of the previous day until 12 noon of the current day)
Total voyage distance
Change of safety
contour
Safety contour
Automatically Safety contour: Previous value=XXm, New value=XXm
Change of safety
depth
Safety depth
change
Automatically Safety depth: Previous value=XXm, New value=XXm
GPS failure
GPS failure
Automatically GPS failure
Log failure
LOG failure
Automatically LOG failure – No input
GYRO failure
GYRO failure
Automatically GYRO failure – No input
TCS mode turned ON
TCS mode
Automatically Track control turned ON
TCS mode turned OFF
TCS mode
Automatically Track control turned OFF
System start
System start
Automatically Empty
Pilot on board
Pilot on board
Manually
Pilot on board
Pilot Off
Pilot off
Manually
Pilot off
Pilot change
Pilot change
Manually
Pilot change
Reporting point
Reporting point
Manually
Empty
Commence cargo
Start loading
Manually
Empty
Checks on departure
Departure status
Manually
Empty
Loading completed
Loading completed
Manually
Empty
Inspection control
Inspection control
Manually
Empty
operations
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Ship Logbook
147
Event
Ship logbook entry
Recording
mode
Comments
At anchor
At anchor
Manually
Empty
In the port
In the port
Manually
Empty
Safety record
Safety record
Manually
Empty
Event
Event
Manually
Empty
Change of command
Change of
command
Manually
Captain XXX has handed over command. /Captain YYYY
has taken over command..
Records in the Ship Logbook are stored for 90 days, during this time they can be edited, and comments can
be entered. The records are then sent to the archive (see below).
The Ship log book is available on 3 bridge stations only (backup-0, backup-1, backup-2). The priority backup-0,
etc. is set in the System Configuration utility during the installation (see the document Multi-Functional Display (v.
3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings). The Ship
Logbook is written from the station with backup-0 and backup-1 priority and synchronised with the rest of
stations via the network. When events, custom events and user accounts are added in the Ship Logbook,
whether from the WS with the backup-0 priority or the WS with the backup-0 priority, they will be displayed on
all the WS’s in the network. In the case of the network breakdown and its subsequent restoration, the Ship
Logbooks on all the WS’s will be synchronised with Ship Logbooks of both, the WS with backup-0 priority and
the WS with backup-1 priority. The events from the WS with backup-1 priority which are not available on the WS
with backup-0 priority will appear there, and the other way round. When the WS with the backup-0 priority is
turned off, its role is passed to the WS with the backup-1 priority, and after it has been turned on, the Ship
Logbook will be synchronized with the Ship Logbook of that WS with backup-1 priority.
Making Corrections and Safety
General
The ECDIS task provides a capability to make corrections in some parameters of the events and enter
comments on the event; the watch schedule an also be edited. To do this, you have to enter the user and
password.
This operation can only be performed by the authorised user who is entered in the list of persons authorized
to edit the log on Logbook accounts of tab of Logbook Settings page.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
148
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Editing Event Parameters
Correction of the event parameters are made by authorised users direct in the cells of the Ship Logbook
table. No correction of parameters can be made for Time UTC, Event, LAT\LON and Source. After the input of
corrections in the Ship Logbook, the name of the edited event and the cell where the editing was done are
shown in bold type. When the cursor is positioned on this cell, a hint appears showing the parameter’s
original value, i.e., the value which the parameter had at the moment when the event was entered in the
Ship Logbook.
The history of making corrections is arranged chronologically on the History list tab.
The History list tab shows the following information:
l
time and date when the correction was made;
l
name of the user who entered the correction;
l
edited parameter name;
l
initial and corrected value of the edited parameter.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Ship Logbook
149
When the Ship Logbook is printed out, the event in which the parameter was corrected, is marked with a
reference to the footnote; the correction will look as follows:
At the end of each day, there is a History list page containing all the references.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
150
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Entering Comments
Comments on the events are made by authorised users when the event is entered in a free text format.
The Comment tab only shows the most recent version of comments on the given events.
The Comment tab only shows the most recent version of comment on the given event. The name of the event
which a comment was made manually for is shown in the bold type.
The name of the event which a comment was made manually for is shown in the bold type. The history of
making comments is arranged chronologically on the History list tab.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Ship Logbook
151
The History list tab displays the following information:
l
time and date when the comment was entered;
l
name of the user who entered the comment;
l
initial and corrected comment.
If the comment was deleted, the corrected value will have a form of a vacant “***” field.
When the Ship Logbook is printed out, comment on the event in which the parameter was corrected, is
marked with a reference to the footnote; the correction will look as follows:
At the end of each day, there is a History list page containing all the references.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
152
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Archiving Ship Logbook
Records over the last 90 days are stored in the Ship Logbook. With the beginning of each new day, the record
for the 90th day is copied to the archive Ship Logbook. Access to these records can only be obtained from the
Archive page. There can be no editing of the archive Ship Logbook.
After entries for 90 days are accumulated in the Ship Logbook, it is automatically packaged and will be stored
in the archive form. Each archive Ship Logbook has a heading: DD Month YYYY – DD Month YYYY. Archive logs
are numbered in the chronological order.
The logbook archiving is preformed in a self-extracting file. The archive logbooks are stored in the MFD for
two years.
The archive Ship Logbooks can be printed out from the Print Settings page by using the Date filter. Provided in
the filter are dates from the first record in the Ship Logbook, stored in the MFD.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Electronic System Logbook
153
Electronic System Logbook
Electronic System Logbook Formation Principles
Electronic system logbook is a file where both, navigational and system events are automatically recorded. It
should be noted that any possibility of making changes in or manipulating with this data, is ruled out. In
addition, the navigator can at any moment make a manual entry, enter data on the weather and his/her own
comments in Remarks column. Access to this data and a capability to supplement it is provided both, from
the ECDIS task, and from the Play Back utility.
An electronic system logbook file is formed every 24 hours (with the change of date by UTC time). If the ECDIS
task was switched on and off several times during the date, the data is recorded to a file with an appropriate
date. As this is done, each switching on and off is recorded as an individual event (“START/STOP”). Operations
(deleting, copying, viewing, etc.) on the data file are performed in the Data Tool utility.
The System logbook is presented in the form of a table consisting of horizontal rows (event parameters) and
vertical columns (events). For the convenience sake and in order to provide sorting capability, all the events
are divided into groups:
l
Main group: events always reflected in the ship log;
l
Sensors group: events connected with the status of external sensors;
l
Network group: events connected with the change of the network configuration status;
l
Charts group: events connected with the changing chart collection;
l
Route group: events connected with motion along the route and according to the schedule;
l
Alarms group: events connected with alarm messages;
l
Layers group: events connected with the chart object classes;
l
Settings group: events connected with the ECDIS task settings made by the operator.
The System Log page of the Logbook panel on the ECDIS task screen can display any set of event parameters
set in Fields window. The display of event groups (except the main group which is always displayed) is set in
Filter window.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
154
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
A full set of parameters implies the recording of all the relevant data in the table, if the set includes only part
of parameters, then only part of them is recorded (see an example of “START” event display on the drawing
above).
With any of the event groups enabled for the display in the ship log (Filter window), the time when any event
from this group occurs is recorded automatically on the own ship track which is being plotted. Therefore, to
declutter the track display (remove superfluous data), it is advisable to turn off the event groups not required
for the graphic display.
Contents of the Electronic Ship Log
The electronic ship logbook consists of the following groups:
l
Main group;
Event
Set of documented
parameters
Notes
START
Full
Turning of the ECDIS task on
STOP
Full
Turning of the ECDIS task off
EVENT
Full
Event recording at the navigator’s command
WATCH
Full
End of the watch
TIME
Full
Automatic recording at the set time
GMT DAY
Full
Change of date by the UTC
CORRECTIONS
Full
Input of offset to the ship position coordinates received
from the sensor
TIME ZONE
Part
Change of time zone
WAY POINT
Full
Passing of a WPT
PRIMARY OFFSET1
Full
Information on the user entered offset to the ship
position coordinates received from the positioning
system
l
Sensors group;
Event
Set of documented
parameters
Notes
SENSOR CONNECTION
Part
Connection of a navigation sensor
SENSOR DISCONNECTION
Part
Disconnection of a sensor
1– event is recorded with “START” and “WATCH” events.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Electronic System Logbook
l
Network group;
Event
Set of documented
parameters
Notes
CONNECT TO MASTER
Full
Connection to the MASTER station
DISCONNECT FROM MASTER
Full
Connection with the MASTER station lost
Set of documented
Notes
l
155
Charts group;
Event
parameters
CHART
Part
Any change in the chart collection
Event
Set of documented
parameters
Notes
LOAD ROUTE
Part
Loading of a passage route to be proceeded by in the
COLLECTION
CHANGED
l
Route group;
Navigation mode
UNLOAD ROUTE
Part
Unloading of a route from
the Navigation mode
l
Alarms group;
Event
Set of documented
parameters
Notes
ALARM SET
Part
Alarm generation
ALARM RESET
Part
The safety parameter whose exceeded value caused this
alarm generation normalised
ALARM REACT
Part
Alarm acknowledged by the operator
ALARM ENABLE
Part
Monitoring of the safety parameter for the alarm
generation enabled
ALARM DISABLE
Part
Monitoring of the safety parameter for the alarm
generation disabled
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
156
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
Layers group;
Event
Set of documented
parameters
Notes
SET OFF object class
Part
Presentation of an individual object class of the additional
information display turned off
SET ON object class
Part
Presentation of an individual object class of the additional
information display turned on
l
Settings group.
Event
Set of documented
parameters
Notes
(Setting type) SET
Part
Settings of the safety parameters and chart display
(function indicator position)
(autoloading
and scaling) made by the operator
Display of Electronic Ship Logbook in Data Tool Utility
The electronic system logbook data (System Log Book/Traks/Targers file group) is stored in the day folders DD–
MM-YYYY, (where: DD – day; MM – month; YYYY – year).
The following operations can be performed on these folders:
l
l
l
copying onto the external carrier and the other way round;
moving (these functions are available for the files more than 7 days old;
up to this time, lines with the files are highlighted);
deleting (these functions are available for the files more than 7 days old;
up to this time, lines with the files are highlighted);
l
converting to text format;
l
viewing and printing out.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Own Ship Track
157
Own Ship Track
Display of the Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task
The ECDIS task operation in the navigation mode implies the display of the own ship symbol on the screen,
whilst the ECDIS task ship track plotting function referred to as the own ship track function serves for the
monitoring of the ship motion. The track parameters are archived automatically:
The ship’s primary track is reproduced from the archive data and provides the navigator with a set of data on
the voyage history in an easy-to-read form. The archive data provides a day files InsTrack.trk. Such files
store information on the ship motion parameters and colour assigned to the tracks at each integer-valued
minute, as well as the coordinates from the primary and secondary positioning systems every 10 seconds.
There is also a capability to concurrently record the detailed track; to do this, it is necessary to make
appropriate settings in the System Configuration utility during the installation (see document Multi-Functional
Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings).
The Detailed Track records coordinates from the primary and secondary positioning systems every 1 second.
Duration of the detailed track storage can be set from 5 to 15 days.
For the reproduction of information in the ECDIS task and the Play Back utility, there is a facility for the
display of an archive track for the date selected from the list provided by Track history function (Track date in
the Play Back utility).
The operator can also select the displayed track plot interval. In this case, it is the detailed track available for
the selected time interval which is played back first, and when it is over, the standard track is played back.
The own ship position and its motion parameters (HDG/STW/COG/SOG) are reconstructed from the day
folder.
The display of the own ship track is static (points with archived coordinates are displayed).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
158
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Track Elements
A track displayed in the real time is created from the data of the file for the selected date and contains the
following elements:
l
l
l
Track colour allows different track segments to be shown in the certain colour assigned to this segment. It
should be noted that the set colour will be used for the display of the track segment created after the
colour is assigned via Track Colour function. The colour of the segment is determined during the voyage
and remains unchanged;
Track plot interval is distance of the track points from each other. The track may be displayed with a plot
interval of 10 sec (by default) or 1 min at the user’s choice. The selection is made via Plot Interval function;
Displayed track length: the ECDIS task screen displays the ship track with time tags corresponding to the
events entered in the ship logbook in the specified period of time. A period from 1 hour to 24 hours can
be set via Own ship track function. If zero is set, the display of the track and time tags is stopped.
Display of Own Ship Track in Data Tool Utility
Ownship tracks (System Log Book/Tracks/Targets file group) are stored in the day folders DD–MM-YYYY,
(where: DD – day; MM – month; YYYY – year).
The following operations can be performed on these folders:
l
l
l
copying onto the external carrier and the other way round;
moving (these functions are available for the files more than 7 days old; up to this time, lines with the files
are highlighted in yellow colour);
deleting (these functions are available for the files more than 7 days old; up to this time, lines with the files
are highlighted in yellow colour).
Target Data
Archiving of Target Tracks in the MFD
Information on the targets’ motion is displayed on the ECDIS task screen. For the saving of this information,
day folders are created, where the targets’ identifiers, coordinates and motion parameters are recorded over
intervals set on the Tracks page in the System Configuration utility. 10, 20 and 60 seconds intervals can be set.
It should be noted that the recorded information reduces the free disk space on the computer which may be
overfilled in case of a lengthy recording. The deleting of unnecessary files is performed in the Data Tool utility.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 6. Logging Functions • Radar Overlay
159
File Handling in Data Tool Utility
Target tracks (System Log Book/Tracks/Targets file group) are stored in the day folders DD–MM-YYYY, (where:
DD – day; MM – month; YYYY – year).
The following operations can be performed on these folders:
l
l
l
copying onto the external carrier and the other way round;
moving (these functions are available for the files more than 7 days old; up to this time, lines with the files
are highlighted);
deleting (these functions are available for the files more than 7 days old; up to this time, lines with the files
are highlighted).
Radar Overlay
Archiving of Radar Picture in MFD
The radar image is supplied by the RIB hard and software module. The saving of the radar image depends on
the recording interval set in the System Configuration utility (from 1 to 60 sec).
It is necessary to note that the recorded information takes up much space (memory) on the computer hard
disk, which may become overfilled if a large recording duration is set.
The radar overlay recording duration is set from 1 to 5 days on the Tracks page of the INS panel in the System
Configuration utility.
Attention! To avoid data loss, the recording interval parameters may be automatically changed.
File Handling in Data Tool Utility
The radar image (System Log Book/Tracks/Targets file group) are stored in the day folders DD–MM-YYYY,
(where: DD – day; MM – month; YYYY – year).
The following operations can be performed on these folders:
l
copying onto the external carrier and the other way round;
l
moving;
l
deleting.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
160
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Log Book, Route Screen Shots Printout
Graphic Screen Copy
The instant recording of the screen graphic copy is obtained by using <Ctrl> + <P> hotkey combination. In the
process, the screen copy is saved in HH-MM-SS.png format (where, HH-hours, MM-minutes, SS-seconds,
when the screenshot was made). The screen graphic copies are stored in Screenshot feature in Data Tool
utility. The file can be exported for subsequent use with the aid of the Data Tool utility.
Printing Out of Information
A facility for printing out of some types of information has been provided for the documenting purposes.
Some data can be printed out directly in the ECDIS task environment and the Play Back utility, other data is
printed out via the Data Tool utility:
l
l
The following data can be printed in the ECDIS task environment and in the Play Back utility:
o
ship logbook;
o
system logbook; with the use of Print function, events and event parameters, loaded and displayed in
the table as set by the operator, are printed out;
o
route; with the use of Print function, data from the planned route table is
printed out;
o
data of the received NAVTEX navigational warnings.
Data Tool utility allows the following groups of files to be printed out:
o
log book (it becomes possible to print out after the electronic ship logbook file conversion to the text
format);
o
add info (it becomes possible to print out after the map file conversion to the text format);
o
route (it becomes possible to print out after the route file conversion to
the text format).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 7.
Navigation Databases
This chapter provides a description and formation principles of the databases on tides,
tidal and surface currents, as well as the algorithm for the reception and processing
of weather forecasts.
Tides and Tidal Currents
Information on Tides
Information on Tidal Currents
Surface Currents
Ports
NAVTEX Messages
General
NAVTEX Messages Database
NAVTEX Messages Viewing and Editing
Position Display on an Electronic Chart
162
162
164
165
166
167
167
168
169
171
162
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Tides and Tidal Currents
Information on Tides
The tides calculation in MFD is performed on the base of four Main harmonics as well as shallow water
corrections. The calculation process is based on Simplified Harmonic Method of Tidal Predictions that can be
found in different publications, for example Admiralty Tide Tables.
Note: Results of the used method may have minor difference with published Admiralty Tide Tables or other
prediction software, which can use more harmonic constituents; and result can be expected to be greater.
This function allows the following to be displayed:
l
l
l
Tidal curve specifying the tidal height (in metres and feet) depending on the time (local of ship time);
Tidal level value which is set by the navigator proceeding from the ship draught and the minimum
passage depth;
Time intervals marked with vertical lines and highlighted with colour when the tidal height level is higher
than the set one.
Information on tides is selected from the provided table by the reference point. To determine the closest
reference points, it is necessary to set the radius of the area coverage (By Choice function) where the reference
points are located, and to select the centre of the coverage circle by using the cursor (Select). As this is done,
the table and the chart display the names of such points.
Data on the tides in the selected reference point is displayed in the graphic (Diagram tab) and text form (Table
tab).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 7. Navigation Databases • Tides and Tidal Currents
163
To determine the tidal height at any set time, use the following procedure:
l
l
In case of a diagram – turn on Cursor data function, then on the curve use the up-and-down motion (of
the trackball/mouse) to move the cursor to the required moment of time and get the reading of the tidal
height in the additional information section:
In case of a table – make a setting in Time Step function and select the tidal height calculations discretion:
The following inequality is used for calculating the safe passage level:
Min. Chart depth + Tidal Height > Draught + UKC
The Min. Chart depth, Draught and UKC values are set by the user, the Tidal Height is taken from the database.
The safe passage level is shown in blue on the diagram, the dangerous passage level is shown in red.
Min. Chart depth is the actual chart sounding specified in the passage point.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
164
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Besides, the ECDIS task allows viewing the dynamics of changes in the tidal height in all the reference points
available in the MFD database with an hour discretion (Animate function on the Control Panel Environment
Data display):
Information on Tidal Currents
The MFD tidal current database was generated on the basis of information provided on paper nautical
charts, in the official editions of atlases and tables. In these publications, tidal current vectors for individual
points of the sailing area covered by the given chart or table, are calculated for every hour.
The ECDIS task features a capability to display vectors and take into account the tidal current effect (in the
schedule calculations). Tidal current vectors are shown on the ECDIS task screen in dark blue colour. Vectors
issue from the reference point whose coordinates and current parameters were taken from the
aforementioned sources. For the current ship position, the effective current is determined by
the interpolation between the closest reference points. The Control Panel System Information display shows
the summary tidal and surface current:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 7. Navigation Databases • Surface Currents
165
In addition to the display of current vectors for the current moment of time, the ECDIS task provides a
capability to view the current change dynamics with discretion of one hour ( Animate function on the Control
Panel Environment Data display). It should be noted that the viewing of the tidal current change dynamics
may be combined with the simultaneous display of tidal height change dynamics in all the reference points
available in the MFD database.
To turn on the display of tidal current speed values, use Current Velocity Values checkbox in Environment Data
display.
In this case, the speed values are displayed on scales of 1:400,000 and larger.
Surface Currents
Information on the surface current was created after the processing of the primary (observed) data of the
American National Ocean Data Centre (NODC and NOAA).
The ECDIS task features a capability to display vectors and take into account the surface current effect (in the
schedule calculations). Surface current vectors are shown on the ECDIS task screen in black colour. Vectors
issue from the reference point whose coordinates and current parameters were taken from
the aforementioned sources. For the current ship position, the effective current is determined by the
interpolation between the closest reference points. The Control Panel System Information display shows the
summary tidal and surface current:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
166
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
In addition to the display of current vectors for the current moment of time, the ECDIS task provides a
capability to view the current change dynamics with discretion of one month (Animate function on the
Control Panel Environment Data display).
Ports
Information on the ports is based on document PUB 150, “World Port Index” published by the Defense
Mapping Agency, USA. It should be noted that this is only approximate information, which does not
necessarily include all the navigational and other features affecting the safety at sea, or the latest updates. To
make any additions to this data, use ECDIS task facility for maps and updating objects.
Information on the selected port is displayed in a window in the bottom part of the ECDIS task screen, and
contains the following information:
l
Name of the port, country and area which the port belongs to (in the top line of the information window);
l
Location – port location;
l
General info tab contains the following groups of data:
o
Harbour – harbour type and size;
o
Pilotage – the necessity or advisability of taking a pilot is given;
o
Entrance restrictions – list of natural factors restricting the vessels’ entrance;
o
Formalities – port formalities;
o
Load/offload – cargo handling operations;
o
Quarantine – quarantine procedures and documents;
o
Tugs – the availability the tugs for docking or anchorage assistance.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 7. Navigation Databases • NAVTEX Messages
l
167
Facilities & services tab contains the following groups of data:
o
Communications – available communications;
o
Services – provided port services;
o
Cranes & Lifts – the availability of the cranes available and what type, and indicates its lifting power in
tons;
o
Supplies – the availability of provisions, water, and fuel oil is listed;
o
Other – other information.
NAVTEX Messages
General
Warning! The Navtex panel of the ECDIS task which the NAVTEX functionality is handled from, is not available
unless this option is licensed and its correct configuring has been made in the System Configuration utility (see
document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I ).
The MFD allows real-time reception and processing of text messages from the NAVTEX receiver. The
automatic processing allows the coordinates to be extracted from the text message and this position to be
displayed on the electronic chart.
There are the following functions to be performed:
l
l
Reception of messages sent from NAVTEX receiver to the MFD serial port in ASCII and NMEA format
compatible with IEC 61097-6, Second Edition, 2005-12 (for the message format see document MultiFunctional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 4, section NAVTEX Sensor Data Exchange
Format );
Archiving of NAVTEX messages in the NAVTEX messages database on the each WS; the database
synchronising is performed automatically on all the workstations;
l
Readout of information from the database, filtering and formation of the Message Table;
l
Display of a particular message in the viewing window by selecting it:
o
From the message table;
o
By “MSI” symbol (NAVTEX message symbol) displayed in the ECDIS task screen and viewing of
information contained in NAVTEX messages with the use of “Info” functionality.
l
User updating of coordinates contained in the messages;
l
ECDIS task chart area display of a symbol in the coordinates specified in the message;
l
Message printout;
l
NAVTEX receiver alarm management (see Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph
Safety Alerts).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
168
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
NAVTEX Messages Database
In the MFD, the database of NAVTEX messages is available in each WS and is automatically synchronised on
all the WS’s. If the Update Database button is pressed, a certain time interval (from 5 to 60 min) later these
database are automatically updated. This time interval is set in the System Configuration utility on the Navtex
panel in the Device polling timeout input window. Comparing with the NAVTEX receiver database and adding
missing messages make the updating. Some NAVTEX receivers have a function for the automatic relay of new
messages; in this case, new NAVTEX messages will be sent to the MFD even with the Update Database button
released.
Special attention should be paid to the Navtex Out Monitor function, which is turned on by using the button
with the same name. This function allows all the received messages to be requested from the NAVTEX
receiver, regardless of the filter settings in the NAVTEX receiver itself. If the filter settings have been changed
in the NAVTEX receiver, the button is released automatically, and it should be pressed again to avoid losing
part of the messages.
Messages are deleted from the database in the manual mode by pressing the Delete button. It is also
possible to delete all the messages received before some moment of time with the aid of the Delete till
button. The time specified in the box to the right of this button. After the deleting of messages, databases
in all the WS’s are synchronised:
NAVTEX messages from the database are displayed in the Message Table on the Navtex panel. The use of the
filter allows displaying messages in accordance with the set filter parameters.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 7. Navigation Databases • NAVTEX Messages
169
The following message filtering parameters can be set in the Filter row for the display in the database:
l
l
l
Permission to display messages selected by the NAVTEX stations;
Permission to display the selected message subjects (NAVTEX messages of a certain type: navigational
warnings, meteorological warnings, ice reports, etc.); messages with the following subjects will always be
displayed regardless of the filter settings:
o
A – navigational warnings;
o
B – meteorological warnings;
o
D – SAR messages;
o
L – navigational warnings additional to letter “A”.
Permission to display messages selected by the error rate.
To select messages received (due to inadequate reception) with a large number of errors, the Max error rate
in the received message is required to be set. Messages whose reception error per cent exceeds this value are
not displayed. Setting of the maximum error per cent at 100% means the display of all the messages.
For the operator’s convenience, messages can be sorted. Using the buttons with column names in the
Message Table performs the message sorting. This function allows the following types of sorting:
l
l
l
l
l
By “Danger” attribute – all the messages in the table are sorted by the availability or absence of the
“Danger” attribute;
By date and time – all the messages in the table are sorted by the reception dates and time;
By station – all the messages in the table are sorted by stations; messages received from a single station
are sorted by types; messages from a single station and of a single type are sorted by numbers (from the
message heading);
By subject – all the messages in the table are sorted by subjects;
By frequency – all the messages in the table are sorted by frequency which they were received on (for
NMEA NAVTEX only);
l
By serial number – all the messages in the table are sorted by serial numbers (from the message heading);
l
By status – all the messages in the table are sorted by their status (“Protected” or not).
NAVTEX Messages Viewing and Editing
The MFD features a capability to view a NAVTEX message, and also to edit it: to correct coordinates sent in
the messages and to change the message status:
After the message has been displayed in the viewing window, it becomes possible to change the NAVTEX
message status.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
170
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The checked Examined checkbox
means that the user has read the text of this message.
Messages with the “Examined” status are shown in the Message Table in regular fonts, otherwise in the bold
fonts.
The checked Protected checkbox
means that the user has protected this message. In this case,
the word “Protected” is shown in the Status column of the Message Table. This kind of message cannot be
deleted from the database.
In addition to the status, the NAVTEX message can have “Danger” and “Polygon” attributes which affect
alarm generation. In this case, only positions with the “Danger” attribute are processed. This attribute is
assigned via Danger function in the Navtex panel. By default, this attribute is assigned to all messages, which
obtain valid coordinates. In this case, position, extracted from the message, is processed in the MFD as a
danger to navigation. Therefore, upon the approach to the message symbol to the distance determined by
the safety parameter, Nav. Danger alarm is generated (see Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles ,
paragraph Safety Alerts).
The user can assign the “Polygon” attribute to a NAVTEX message, which contains more than one pair of
coordinates. All the NAVTEX symbols available in this message are connected successively with a line. If the
“Approach to area” vector crosses this line, the NAVTEX polygon warning appears. The triggering off of this
warning can also be turned on in the Additional Areas window on the Navigational Alarms page of the
Monitoring panel (see Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles , paragraph Safety Alerts).
The received valid coordinates from NAVTEX messages which are processed in the MFD, are highlighted in the
message text and are shown to the right of the message in a special window. If the coordinates are received
with errors (“*” symbols), which can be corrected (e.g., errors are insignificant or there are additional data
sources), the ECDIS task has a capability to edit them. The following operations can be performed:
l
l
l
Editing of coordinate values; at this stage the coordinate value in the table is shown in italic indicating that
the field has been edited by the user;
Adding of a new symbol position in the message text, a new pair of coordinates shown in italic indicating
that the field has been edited by the user;
Deleting a symbol position.
The example below shows edited coordinates, which were supplied by the NAVTEX message in an incorrect
form:
After the editing of selected coordinates is completed, it is necessary to confirm the changes you have made
by pressing Apply: the updating information will be saved in the NAVTEX message database.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 7. Navigation Databases • NAVTEX Messages
171
Position Display on an Electronic Chart
It should be noted that the ECDIS task allows positions whose coordinates are contained in a message to be
displayed on the electronic chart, and to be shown in the form of orange coloured “MSI” symbol – NAVTEX
message symbol.
If a message contains several coordinate pairs, it is possible to present them on the electronic chart in the
form of a polygon (positions are connected with lines). This capability is implemented via the Polygon function
of the Navtex panel. An example of such polygon is shown in the figure below:
The ECDIS task features a capability to view the text of the message whose position is displayed on the
electronic chart. This functionality is implemented via the Info function (see Chapter 1, section Info):
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8.
Radar Task
This chapter provides a description of MFD program features.
Video Signal Processing Principles
Factors Affecting Radar Operation Quality
Clutter Suppression Facilities
Radar Features
Radar Transceiver Modes
On-PPI Image Formation Principle
Brightness and Contrast Setting Rules for Radar Picture
Display Brightness Adjustment
Overlay Colour
Radar Transceiver Adjustment
Stabilisation Modes
Own Ship Presentation Modes
Own Ship Motion Modes
MFD Operation Modes Availability Table
Range Scales and Range Rings
Radar Adjustment in the Absence of Targets
Radar Reflectors and Beacons
Operation for SART Detection
Radar Trails
Parallel Index Lines
Variable Range Marker (VRM)
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)
Radar Picture Referencing
Performance Monitor
Mute (Blank) Sectors
Radar Maps
Combining Radar Overlay
RADAR User Configurations
Indications in RADAR Task
175
175
180
191
191
192
193
195
195
196
197
198
198
199
200
201
201
202
204
207
207
207
207
209
211
212
212
215
216
174
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Display of ARPA Targets
Targets Tracking Limitations
Collision Avoidance
ARPA Targets Acquisition and Drop from Tracking
Display and Naming of ARPA Targets
Dangerous ARPA Targets
Vectors of ARPA Targets
Selected Target
Guard Zones
Past Position
Lost Targets
Trial Manoeuvre
Curved Heading Line
Simulator Targets
Display of AIS Targets
General Information
Naming of AIS Targets
AIS Target Symbol Types, Orientation
Activated and Non-Activated AIS Targets
Dangerous AIS Targets
AIS Target in Guard Zone
Lost AIS Targets
Selected Target
Own Ship Data
Trial Manoeuvre for AIS Targets
Associating AIS and ARPA Targets
Turning AIS Functionality OFF
DR Mode of AIS Targets
Display of Chart Information on RADAR Task
Chart Loading
Information about Charts and Chart Objects
Effect of Errors on Chart Information Display Accuracy
Chart Layers Control
Chart Object Display
Conditions of Displaying Electronic Charts
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
221
222
222
223
224
228
230
230
230
233
233
235
236
236
236
237
238
238
239
239
240
240
240
241
243
245
246
246
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
175
Video Signal Processing Principles
Factors Affecting Radar Operation Quality
General
The main criterion of the radar’s high-quality operation is how adequately the current navigational situation
is understood by the navigator: the targets and navigational obstacles identified.
The radar’s effective functioning is ensured by the following factors:
l
High quality equipment installation during the system assembly and setting up of the transceiving
channel parameters;
l
Periodic system diagnostics for compensating the components wear in the course of operation;
l
Adjustment of clutter suppression parameters to suit the current signal-and-clutter situation.
This paragraph provides general recommendations on the system installation, lists factors causing
deterioration of the radar operation and ways to eliminate them.
There is also description of clutter suppression and recommendations on the adjustment of controls.
Equipment Installation Factors Affecting Radar Functioning Quality
This item provides general recommendations on the antenna installation, cabling and the preliminary
transceiver adjustment, which will allow the radar functioning to be improved.
The antenna installation site should be selected so as to minimise the possibility of the echo reflected by the
ship superstructure (masts, etc.) being received. The minimum distance to the closest obstacle should be at
least 5 metres. Antenna units of radars which have the same band, should be installed at different heights in
order to rule out the direct signal propagation from one antenna to another.
The antenna should be installed in a way which would ensure the all-round view of the space. If there are any
shadow zones (zones obstructed by the ship superstructure) the transmission-prohibited sectors (blank
sectors) should be set.
The antenna installation site should be chosen so as to minimise the cable length from the transceiver unit to
the radar signal processing device. The superfluous cable (waveguide) length may result in the appearance of
spurious signals and worsening of the radar sensitivity.
After the radar installation, the condition of cables should be visually checked for the absence of the cable
bends, twists of the flexible waveguide (for the “down master” type devices), quality of cable connections and
high-frequency connector contacts.
After the radar system installation, the system tentative diagnostics and setup should be performed. For the
radar setup procedure, see document Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I .
After the end of the setup, the transceiver parameters: magnetron current in the transmission mode,
magnetron operation time and others (the list of parameter varies for radars by different manufacturers)
should be entered in the system data sheet.
In the course of operation, these parameters should be regularly checked, at least once a week. In the case of
the parameter deterioration (e.g., decrease of the magnetron current), the system is required to be adjusted.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
176
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Attention! The transceiver parameters setup should be performed by trained engineers. Incorrect selection
of parameters may worsen significantly the system operation quality.
The transceiver channel components are required to be replaced at the time specified by the equipment
manufacturer.
Environmental Factors Affecting Radar Functioning Quality
This group combines factors caused by the changes in the radio signal propagation and reception conditions
due to the weather conditions and/or environmental changes.
At the transceiver output, the signal is an additive mixture of useful signals (reflected by targets, navigational
objects, coasts) and clutter. The clutter impedes the navigator’s perception of the navigational situation
because of the useful signals masking. Passive and active clutter is distinguished.
A view of the radar with the suppression clutter turned off is given below:
The clutter characteristics vary considerably, and different clutter compensating facilities are used for their
suppression.
Receiver’s Own Noise
This type of clutter decrease the probability of objects being detected at large ranges, since the target echo
level becomes comparable with the level of the radar receiver noise. The clutter looks like low-brightness
point clutter on the radar screen. The own noise level depends on the radar operating mode and the
outgoing pulse length, to be more exact, on the receiver passband. To suppress this type of clutter, it is
necessary to use the GAIN control (see the next paragraph). The signal-to-noise ratio can be increased by
turning on the signal scan-to-scan correlation mode: “Accumulation” (see the next paragraph).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
177
Sea Clutter
The antenna beam width is about 20 degrees vertically, and in the process of scanning it covers water surface
around the ship, which, firstly, increases the average echo level (dense noise at the PPI origin) and, secondly,
creates echoes from the waves which look very much like useful signals from targets. The level of the second
type clutter depends on the sea: with the calm sea of 0-1 points the clutter is at its minimum and increases
with the growth of the wave height.
This clutter is concentrated in the vicinity of the own ship (within the radar horizon limits), whereas the
maximum water observation distance depends on the antenna elevation.
To eliminate the sea clutter, you should use the SEA control (see the next paragraph). The sea clutter can be
reduced by turning on the signal scan-to-scan correlations (“Accumulation”) which ensured decorrelation of
spurious echoes (see the next paragraph).
Precipitation Clutter
This type of echo occurs when there are volumetric extended objects on the way of the radio signal
propagation: rain, snow, dust clouds. The deterioration of the radar operation quality in the presence of this
kind of clutter is due to the following factors:
l
The signal absorption and scattering results in the decrease of the target detection range;
l
Echoes from the precipitation create considerable noise masking the useful signal on the screen.
The first cause cannot be eliminated in any way, it should merely be taken into account. To detect targets at a
large distance in the case of intensive clutter, it is advisable to use an S-band radar which less sensitive to the
radio wave scattering.
Table 1. Rain-dependent target detection range reduction. X-band radar
Detection
range: no
rain, miles
Detection range: rain
of 4 mm/h, short pulse
(SP), miles
Detection range: rain
of 16mm/h, short pulse
(SP), miles
Detection range: rain
of 4mm/h, long pulse
(LP), miles
Detection range: rain
of 16mm/h, long pulse
(LP), miles
1
0.25
0.1
-
-
3
2.3
1.1
0.4
0.1
5
4.7
3.0
1.0
0.2
7
6.5
4.8
3.0
0.7
9
8.1
6.0
3.5
1.0
11
10.0
7.1
6.2
1.7
13
11.7
8.0
9.2
2.3
15
13.0
9.0
11.6
3.2
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
178
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Table 2. Rain-dependent target detection range reduction. S-band radar
Detection
range: no
rain, miles
Detection range: rain
of 4 mm/h, short pulse
(SP), miles
Detection range: rain
of 16mm/h, short pulse
(SP), miles
Detection range: rain
of 4mm/h, long pulse
(LP), miles
Detection range: rain
of 16mm/h, long pulse
(LP), miles
1
0.8
0.2
0.1
0.1
3
3.0
2.0
1.7
0.2
5
5.0
4.4
2.0
0.8
7
7.0
6.8
4.3
1.2
9
9.0
8.9
7.4
2.1
11
11.0
10.9
10.0
3.5
13
12.9
12.8
12.2
6.3
15
14.9
14.9
14.6
10.0
To reduce the precipitation clutter noise on the radar screen, it is advisable to use the RAIN control (see the
next paragraph). Note that this control will allow identification of those targets only, whose signal level
exceeds the clutter level.
Clutter Caused by Multi-Beam Radio Signal Propagation (Second Time Echo)
The radar signal has a rectilinear propagation pattern, this is why the echo position on the radar screen
normally corresponds to the actual target bearing. If, however, there are some obstacles (parts of own ship
structured, buildings, etc.) in the radar’s operating area, there may be reception of both, echo which comes
direct from the actual object and the mirror-reflected signal: a signal reflected by these obstacles. As this
occurs, the screen displays a false echo from an object which does not actually exist.
The MFD does not provide any special facilities for the suppression of this kind of clutter. This clutter is
distinguishable by the nature of the false spot motion on the screen, which is due to the changing aspect as
the objects are moving relative to each other.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
179
False Spots Caused by Multiple Echo
If a vertically extended target is close to the own ship, very large vertically, there may be multiple re-mirroring
of a radio signal between the objects. When this occurs, the screen displays a number of spots on a single
bearing. The distinctive feature of such clutter is the repetition regularity: the distance between the spots
distance from the radar to the first spot. The false marks are shown below:
Interference from Other Radars
All the navigation radars of the same band operate on approximately the same frequency. In the intensive
sea traffic conditions, or when there are several radars of the same band on the ship, there may be reception
of signals transmitted by other units. The appearance of this interference on the screen depends on the
repetition period ratio. If the periods differ significantly, the interference looks like bright clutter with small
azimuthal length, arranged chaotically on the screen. If the repetition periods are alike, the interference looks
like bright spirals.
To eliminate the interference, turn on the “Interference Rejection” mode (see the next paragraph). This
rejecter implements two functions:
l
l
It turns on a periodic change of the own radar repetition frequency (the particular frequency change
method depends on the radar type). This ensures “splitting” of a solid spiral into individual fragments
scattered on the screen;
It turns on the interference detector. As the result, segmented clutter is removed from the screen.
The use of other controls, e.g., the GAIN for rejecting this interference is generally ineffective, since the
interference is distinguished by a large amplitude, and the reduced gain may result in that weak targets will
be missed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
180
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Antenna Sidelobe Clutter
Where a large size target is available in the vicinity of the own ship, the radio signal may be received not only
via the main lobe, but also via the sidelobes. This kind of clutter looks like weak echoes to the right and to the
left of the main spot. The operator may take them to be a group target.
This clutter is caused by target at short distances.
The main method of coping with this clutter is the use of an antenna with a low sidelobe level. The operator
can weaken the signal by using the GAIN control. But in this case, it is necessary to bear in mind that the
quality of detecting far-off targets is impaired, and when large scales are switched over to, the gain level
should also be increased.
Radar’s Own Signal (Main Bang)
This clutter occurs in the case of incorrect matching of the radar high frequency channel elements. Such
elements are:
l
High frequency cable between the transceiver and the radar processor (RIB6);
l
Waveguide cable between the antenna drive and the down-master radar transceiver.
The signal looks like a bright ring at the PPI origin. This clutter causes increase of the minimum target
detection range: targets at a distance of 0.1 mile are not discernible on the screen.
To eliminate this clutter, it is advisable to reduce the cable length during the system installation, to properly
assemble the high frequency connections and set correct main bang suppression parameters: distance and
level.
Clutter Suppression Facilities
General
For a better display of a navigational situation on the screen, the MFD application implements a number of
controls which allow the radar to be adjusted interactively:
l
Gain;
l
Sea;
l
Rain;
l
Interference rejection;
l
Accumulation;
l
Enhanced video.
None of the aforementioned controls, except for the “Accumulation”, improve the signal-to-noise (signal-toclutter) ration – their operation is based on the threshold level formation. Signals exceeding the threshold are
considered to be useful and are displayed on the screen. Signals below the threshold level are considered to
be clutter and are removed.
This section describes the controls’ operating principles, functioning limitations and recommendation on the
high-quality image adjustment.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
181
Processing of Radar Signals in MFD
The processing of video signal takes into account the set gain, sea and rain level. In the oscillograms provided
here the Gain settings are normal: noises are under the threshold curve, and Sea and Rain settings can be
varied:
l
The sea setting is minimum – the sea clutter exceeds the threshold.
l
The sea setting is normal – the sea clutter is under the threshold.
l
The sea setting is normal – the sea clutter is under the threshold curve. The rain setting is different from
zero: you can see the threshold curve circumventing the distributed targets.
Further targets are extracted from the video signal, the set values of gain, sea and rain are taken into
account.
Gain
The GAIN control is intended for stabilising level of clutter from the radar receiver’s own noises. The GAIN
control sets the signal threshold of radar signals displayed on the screen. For correct gain settings, the
control should be adjusted until a “speckled” background (see picture below) is just visible on the screen.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
182
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The user can set the desired useful signal detection level, the maximum gain level displaying all the receiver
noise on the screen. The zero level ensuring the display of signals higher than 80 per sent of the maximum
possible level.
An exceedingly high gain level impedes visual detection of targets because of the screen cluttering with
noises. With the low gain level, weak targets are not displayed on the screen, which results in the omission of
targets, even during the automatic detection. The optimum level is provided by the control position whereby
at medium and large ranges (6–12 miles), individual noise spots are displayed. It is ill-advised to decrease the
sea clutter by using the GAIN control, since the wave echo in its amplitude is significantly larger than the noise
level, and the target detection range may be reduced.
If a very high gain level is set, some ghost echoes may appear on the PPI.
Rain
The control is intended for eliminating the large-area screen cluttering with precipitation echoes. In this case,
the target observability in the rain zone is improved.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
183
The control operation is based on the signal differentiation – the calculated estimate of mean is subtracted
from the source signal. The estimated mean calculation apertures is matched with the radar outgoing pulse
length.
In addition to decreasing the rain clutter level, the control reduces echoes from the coasts: it is only the closeby and far-off coast limits which remain visible.
The rain setting is adjusted to preserve small targets. It is often beneficial to reduce the gain level to optimise
target detection in high precipitation.
Rain clutter creates a high return of noise-like reflections that effectively decreases the signal to noise levels
within the radar receiver. In addition, it creates an attenuation of the radar signal, which also decreases the
signal to noise levels. Both these effects reduce the target detection capability of a radar system. Assuming a
rain height of 1000 m, and constant rainfall within the detection range, the effect on the range of first
detection is as given for S-Band:
and for X-Band:
As well as frequency of operation, the effect depends on antenna horizontal and vertical beam widths and
the pulse length in operation.
The rain facility also improves range discrimination.
In the absence of precipitation within the radar scanned area, it is recommended that the control should be
set in the zero position.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
184
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Sea
The SEA control is an adjustment that reduced the sea clutter returns. The sea clutter suppression is rather
complex task. The correct control setting is shown below.
Attention! Never set the control to clear all clutter, but leave a light speckle of sea returns to indicate
optimum sensitivity within the clutter field.
The control operation is based on calculating the average signal level within the radar horizon limits and
assessing the level of clutter form individual waves. The radar operator controls the process of obtaining the
assessment of these components by changing the control position. In the control’s zero position, the clutter
suppression is fully turned off. At the maximum suppression level, the threshold level consists of the
estimated mean level and a constant component corresponding to the maximum possible sea clutter (10
points).If a very low sea level is set, some ghost echoes may appear on the PPI.
Considered to be the optimum position of the control is that whereby individual waves can be seen at a
range of up to 6 miles. A higher suppression level may cause the omission of weak targets in the close-by
zone.
During the ship manoeuvring close to the coasts (in a harbour) at a distance of less than 1 mile from the
coast, it is worthwhile to decrease the sea clutter suppression level, since strong returns from the shore
cause considerable growth of the threshold resulting in the suppression of useful signals.
The MFD application implements the “AutoSea” automatic sea clutter suppression algorithm. It is
recommended that this mode should be used when the ship is in the open sea far from the shore. With the
ship entering restricted waters, it is advisable to use the manual clutter suppression mode.
Joint Action of Sea and Rain Controls
No special limitations are imposed on the joint use of the controls.
The possible interaction consists in that the SEA control can reduce the rain clutter level as the ship is passing
the clouds front, but no full compensation is observed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
185
In its turn, the Rain clutter reduces considerably the sea clutter level, but individual waves are clearly seen.
Where both types of clutters are available within the close range (up to 5 miles), it us advisable to use both
controls.
For the restrictions on the control position setting see the general directions.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
186
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Interference Rejection
The interference rejection principle is based on the scan-to-scan signal correlation. The change of the pulse
repetition frequency causes the solid spiral to be split into individual fragments. The detector finds the largest
amplitude surges in three successive scans and eliminates them. To improve the interference rejection
efficiency, the procedure is repeated three times.
In MFD, such interference is eliminated by changing the trigger pulse frequency for the disparity with other
radars, by pressing IR button.
The clutter suppression algorithm is implemented in the RIB6, so the mode can only be turned on the station
with master rights for the radar in question. The slave stations only show the turning on of the mode.
Accumulation
This algorithm increases the amplitude of targets, stationary relative to the own ship (or moving at a low
speed) as compared to the signals non-stationary in the spatial position: noises and waves.
This functionality enables accumulation of video signal for extracting fluctuating and weak targets.
A weak target’s echo may be unsteadily shown on the radar screen, e.g., out of the 10 consecutive antenna
revolutions, the target is discernible in 5 revolutions only. This effect is due to the changes in the radio wave
propagation conditions. Such targets are rather difficult to detect, visually of automatically. To improve the
detection of such targets, we use the processing of data obtained in several consecutive radar scans.
This provides a considerably brighter display of spots situated in the same spatial point as compared to the
noise and sea clutter.
The formation of the accumulated values does not use the image stabilising for compensating the own ship
manoeuvres, so it is advisable to turn off the accumulation mode during the turns.
Attention! Due to the fact that speed and course of the own ship is not incorporated to this feature, it should
be used on the scales where targets are in relatively static condition. In the tracking of targets moving at high
speeds or targets on small scales, it is necessary to set smaller accumulation to avoid false echoes. Also at high
speed (>10 knots) or agile manoeuvres of the own ship, accumulation has to be set to Low level.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
187
With the choice of the Accumulation level, it is necessary to be guided by the following information:
l
Low – for small scales and fast-moving targets;
l
Standard – for medium scales and medium speed targets;
l
High – for scales of more than 6 NM and slow speed targets.
Enhanced Video Mode
This mode is intended for better visual display of radar marks on the screen in order to facilitate the
navigational situation assessment by the navigator.
The Enhanced Video ensures clearer presentation of the current navigational situation by increasing the size
of the displayed target marks. When the mode is activated, the dimensions are increased simultaneously in
range and azimuth.
The turning on of the mode allows two tasks to be accomplished:
l
l
Increase of the radar mark size in azimuth. For marks in the vicinity of the radar PPI centre, the package of
echoes is compressed visually to form a single monitor resolution element, because of the display of
several outgoing pulses. This algorithm extends this kind of signals. In this case, weak signals (wave
echoes) are not increased in azimuth;
Increase of the radar mark in range. This algorithm increases the mark size in range and provides better
target discrimination on the screen during the radar operation on large ranges (more than 6 miles).
Besides, there is better observability of targets in the conditions of unsteady radar contact, e.g., because
of the own ship roll or pitch.
The figures show one and the same navigational situation with the mode turned on and off.
(Enhanced Video Off)
(Enhanced Video On)
The mode implementation is based on the joint use of the video signal processing result with the use of the
clutter filters (Gain, Rain, Sea/Autosea) and automatic detector. Owing to this, even when there is a large
amount of noise type clutter on the screen, it is only the marks supposedly related to the targets which are
increased, rather than all the signals discernible on the screen.
The turning on of the mode worsens the radar display azimuth and range discrimination: two closely-spaced
marks may blend in one.
When such situation occurs, it is advisable to turn off the mode in order to define the actual navigational
situation.
With the incorrect setting of clutter suppression controls and a large number of echoes from the waves,
there may be a large number of enhanced false echoes on the radar screen.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
188
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
In this situation, it is worthwhile to change the clutter suppression level by using the GAIN, RAIN, SEA controls
for obtaining an adequate image.
For the correct mode operation, it is necessary use the Sea control to set the minimum sea clutter in the
close-by zone and then turn on the Enhanced Video. When the bright uniform flares appear, the sea clutter
level should be reduced some more.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Video Signal Processing Principles
189
The incorrect Sea level adjustment results in the appearance of bright flares at a short distance:
(Enhanced Video Off)
(Enhanced Video On)
Correct adjustment of the Sea control position:
(Enhanced Video Off)
(Enhanced Video On)
Recommendations on Adjusting Quality Radar Image
The following order of setting the clutter suppression controls is recommended:
l
Set the radar range at 12 miles. Set the long pulse (LP);
l
Set the SEA and RAIN suppression controls to zero;
l
l
Select one or several targets at a distance of 10–16 miles. These targets will be used for the correct setting
of the gain level – reference targets;
By changing the GAIN control, position down from 100%, keep decreasing the noise level at a distance of
more than 6 miles down to an acceptable level;
l
Switch the pulse length to MP and check that the reference target marks are available;
l
Switch the radar to the 3 mile range;
l
l
l
l
l
Use the SEA control to set the necessary sea clutter suppression level. As this is done, the necessary
quality of the coast display should be provided;
Check if there is interference. Turn on the interference rejection mode as required. This mode can always
be turned on;
The RAIN suppression mode should not be turned on unless there is extensive precipitation clutter on the
screen. In fine weather, the control should be set to zero;
The “Accumulation” mode should be turned on in the following cases: detection of targets at a distance of
more than 12 miles with the own ship rolling, in the case of high sea clutter level at the ranges of 6–12 miles;
If the ship is in the open sea, it is necessary to choose the Offshore mode. If it is in a restricted area (mooring)
it is advisable to select the Harbor mode which permits brightness of close-by objects to be increased.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
190
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The correct adjustment of the clutter suppression facilities is shown below.
Clutter/interference suppression controls
Control
name
Purpose
Usage limitations
IR
To reject interference
None
from other radars
Gain
To eliminate noise
Low gain level results in the omission of weak targets
Rain
To eliminate rain, snow,
Coast signal size is reduced in length
dust clod clutter
Sea
To eliminate sea clutter
High suppression level results in the omission of weak targets at ranges
of up to 6 miles.
High suppression level results in weaker signal of the shore close by
(coastline)
Accumulation To improve weak target
With a high accumulation level, signals from the fast moving targets may
detection and suppress
be missed. It is not advisable to use this mode for radars installed on the
sea clutter
high speed craft.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
191
Radar Features
Radar Transceiver Modes
Attention! Switching of radar transceiver modes is available only at stations with the status Radar MASTER.
Standby
This is default condition of the radar at switch-on. No radar information is displayed, and antenna
is not rotation. The Standby mode is selected from STBY drop-down list in the Display Panel.
The PPI displays the word “STANDBY” and the magnetron operation time.
In the Standby mode, the ARPA button is automatically turned off. The CHART and AIS buttons may remain
turned on, pertinent information displayed on the PPI.
Run
This is active condition of the radar. The antenna is rotating, and the received radar information is
displayed on the PPI. The TX mode is selected from STBY/TX drop-down list in the Display Panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
192
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
On-PPI Image Formation Principle
The image on the PPI is formed by superimposing transparent layers containing different information on
each other with the following priorities:
l
Guard Zones (uppermost layer);
l
ERBL;
l
Parallel Index Lines;
l
Own Ship Data (Ship symbol and Heading Line);
l
Blanc Sectors;
l
Targets and targets past position;
l
Video signal;
l
Trails;
l
Route;
l
MAPS;
l
Charts (lowermost layer).
The layer arrangement order is shown in the Figure below:
As the result, the user forms a consolidated picture of the surroundings. It should be noted that the most
important information is always available and never obscured by other objects.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
193
Brightness and Contrast Setting Rules for Radar Picture
The brilliance and contrast controls serve for setting the most suitable radar image in order to reduce the
operator fatigue.
The Brightness control sets the maximum brilliance of the displayed echo. This control should be used for
reducing the superfluous bridge illumination by the radar screen picture in the nighttime conditions.
Brilliance value can be varied from 0 up to 100.
Zero level signals are substituted with black or blue color.
The Contrast control is used for changing the number of halftones in the picture. The reduction of the
contrast level increases the number of halftones. This allows distinguishing larger intensity signals referring
presumably to the target echo against the background of noises and sea clutter. In this case there may be
worsening of visual distinguishing of weak echoes from faraway targets.
The Contrast control can be set to 3 positions. Settings of the control will change number of grades between
strong and weak echo. Minimum and maximum brilliance of pixels is not changed.
Low contrast level of the Contrast control to the left will produce maximum color set of the radar picture (up
to 32 levels).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
194
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Medium contrast level position of the Contrast control in the middle will produce 8 color presentation of the
radar scene.
Maximum contrast level position of the Contrast control to the right will reduce the radar picture to 2 color
presentation.
With any combinations of Brightness and Contrast controls positions, the lowest amplitude radar signals will
be displayed with the minimum brilliance which can be recognized on the screen.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
195
Display Brightness Adjustment
Brightness of various objects on the PPI is adjusted on the Brilliance panel.
Brightness control is provided for the objects on the PPI only. The General control is intended for the general
brightness control for the following objects:
l
Heading line;
l
Own ship data (symbol and vectors);
l
Targets;
l
Rings;
l
ERBL;
l
Guard zones;
l
Electronic charts infill;
l
Electronic charts objects.
By using the General control you can vary brightness from the maximum value to the full disappearance of
the following objects: heading line, own ship data, electronic charts infill and electronic charts. Targets, rings,
ERBL and Guard zones cannot be fully suppressed by using the General control. In this case you will have to
use individual controls (Targets, Rings, ERBL and GZ).
A press on the Reset to default button sets positions of controls optimum for the natural illumination
conditions.
Overlay Colour
The MFD provides a capability to select the overlay colour: green or yellow. Green is set as a default. When
the yellow colour is selected, the overlay is shown against blue if the following conditions are fulfilled:
l
The Day or Dusk palette is set;
l
The display of electronic charts is turned off (the CHART button is released).
When these conditions are changed, the overlay is shown against black.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
196
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Radar Transceiver Adjustment
Short/Medium/Long Pulse
The setting of a certain outgoing pulse length depends on the current range scale.
Range Scales
(NM)
Available Pulse Lengths
Scanner 30 kW S-
Transas Network Scanners 12/25 kW X-
Scanner BridgeMaster E 10 kW X-
Band
Band
Band
SP
MP
LP
SP
MP
LP
EP
SP
MP
LP
0.25
D
D
D
0.5
D
D
D
M
0.75
D
D
M
D
M
1.5
D
M
D
M
D
M
3
D
M
D
M
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
6
D
M
12
D
M
D
M
24
D
D
M
D
48
D
D
D
For each range scale, the corresponding pulse length is set by default (in the table, these pulse lengths are
marked with the letter “D”). On some scales the operator can set another pulse length (in the table, these
pulse lengths are marked with the letter “M”). After a switch to another range, the pulse length does not
change as along as it is permitted for the set range. Otherwise, a default value is set, and with the further
switches of the range, the default pulse length will be set.
Turning and Responses
The receiver tuning is intended for the reception of the maximum return level. With the automatic tuning ON
(AUTO button is pressed), the receiver will be tuned for the optimum reception of the returns within 10–15%
of the manually set level.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
With AUTO button released, the receiver is tuned by using
indicator reading.
and
197
buttons according to the maximum
Turning affects the signal received. A tuned receiver will receive strong radar returns from its own transmitter.
Conversely a detuned receiver will receive very weak or no radar returns at all from its own transmitter. This
feature is very useful for distinguishing between radar returns and SART transmissions. A detuned receiver
will still receive SART transmissions even though its own transmitter’s radar returns are not being received.
This will have the effect of removing all radar from the display expect SART responses.
Stabilisation Modes
The Sea stabilised mode is data display mode whereby positions of the own ship and all the targets on the
screen are stabilised relative to the water. In this case, the own ship’s gyro heading (HDG), or CTW and speed
from the relative log (LOG), or water track from Doppler log (DLOG) are used.
The Ground stabilised mode is data display mode whereby positions of the own ship and all the targets on
the screen are stabilised relative to the ground. In this case, the system uses the own ship course (COG) and
speed (SOG) over the ground obtained from the relevant sensors, own ship course and speed over the
ground obtained with the use of reference points, or the own ship course (CMG) and speed (SMG) made
good calculated from the readings of course and speed-through-water sensors, the manual drift input taken
into account.
To set stabilisation mode, use drop-down list in the button in the right top corner of the Display Panel.
Note: The data on sources of obtaining of the course and speed selected for stabilization mode are saved when
quitting the MFD application.
Where no data from the aforementioned sensors is available, the own ship and targets positions are not
stabilised. The word “UNSTABILIZED” is displayed in the top right corner of the Display Panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
198
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The Unstabilized mode remains until the data is restored or until the user him/herself changes the
stabilisation.
When the Unstabilized mode is turned on with the Ground stab not available, the ARPA targets have no
vectors.
Own Ship Presentation Modes
North Up
Azimuth presentation whereby an assumed line connecting the scan centre with the azimuth grid zero
represents true direction to the north. Azimuth presentation of the display is not possible unless there is
data from the gyro; if there is not, the system switches to Head Up unstabilised mode.
Course Up
Azimuth presentation whereby an assumed line connecting the scan centre with an azimuth grid point is
coincident with the ship course at the moment when the mode is turned on. Azimuth scale 0 mark indicates
true north.
Head Up
The own ship’s course line is directed vertically upwards, which corresponds to the forward motion. During
the operation in the true motion display mode, Head Up mode is not available.
Own Ship Motion Modes
Relative Motion
Relative Motion (RM) is available with Head-Up (unstabilised), North-Up (stabilised), or Course-Up (stabilised),
on all range scales.
Relative Motion – Unstabilized
In the RM mode, own ship is maintained at a selected point on the display and the motion of all echoes is
shown relative to own ship. This is indicated by the Trails, if turned on.
Relative Motion – Sea Stabilised
In this mode, own ship is maintained at a selected point on the radar screen. The advantage of RM is that a
constant range ahead of own ship is maintained and it’s not necessary to reset the display as in TM.
Relative Motion – Ground Stabilised
In this mode, the position of own ship remains at a preselected position on the screen. With inputs derived
either from a navigation sensor or from tracking a fixed echo (echo reference), echoes from stationary targets
move on the screen relative to own ship.
True Motion
True Motion (TM) is available with North-Up or Course-Up presentation on all ranges.
True Motion – Sea Stabilised
Own ship moves across the radar picture according to the inputs of heading (derived from the compass) and
speed through the water (derived from the log or manually estimated). Echoes from land and all other
stationary targets are presented as objects, which are steady except for the movement due to tide or current
experienced by own ship. Moving targets generate Trails, representing their True heading and speed, but
modified by the tide or current effects referred to above.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
199
True Motion – Ground Stabilised
Own ship moves across the radar picture according to the inputs derived either from tracking a fixed echo
(echo reference) or from a navigation sensor. Echoes from land and all other stationary targets are presented
as fixed objects, i.e. without trails. Moving targets generate true trails, representing their Course Over
Ground and Speed Over Ground.
A disadvantage of the TM presentation mode is that the radar display range ahead of own ship decreases as
own ship moves across the display. The display has to be reset, either automatically when own ship reaches
two thirds of display radius, or manually as required. With TM selected, target trails may be selected or not
as required. With Sea Stabilisation, trails attached to fixed targets give a direct indication of tide or current set
and rate experienced by own ship.
MFD Operation Modes Availability Table
Provided below is a table specifying availability of different MFD operating modes depending on the
availability of sensors.
Sensor availability
H
N
Up Up
C
T
Up vect.
(sea)
None
X
HDG
X
STW
X
HDG+STW
X
X
X
HDG+COG/SOG
X
X
X
HDG+STW+
X
X
X
HDG+POS
X
X
X
HDG+POS+ STW
X
X
X
HDG+POS+
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
vect.
(gr.)
R
vect
RM
TM
(sea
stab)
TM
(gr.
stab)
AIS ARPA MAPS Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
COG/SOG
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
COG/SOG
HDG+POS+
X
X
X
X
X
X
COG/SOG+STW
POS
X
X
POS+STW
X
X
COG/SOG
X
X
COG/SOG+POS
X
X
COG/SOG+POS+STW X
X
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
200
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Range Scales and Range Rings
Attention! Switching of the range scales on scanner is available only at stations with the status Radar
MASTER.
In the MFD, the following range scales can be set: 0.25 mile, 0.5 mile, 0.75 mile, 1.5 mile, 3 miles, 6 miles, 12
miles, 24 miles, 48 miles. The default setting is 6 mile range scale.
Note:The actually covered radar range is 3/4 larger than the set range scale, which ensures high quality display in
TM and OFFCENT modes.
The width of range rings is set with regard to the set range scale:
Range Scale Range Rings Number of Range Rings
0.25
0.125
2
0.5
0.25
4
0.75
0.25
6
1.5
0.5
6
3
0
6
6
1
6
12
2
6
24
4
6
48
8
6
There is a restriction on switching the scale on a WS with the Radar SLAVE status. The scale can only be
switched by one step (up or down) relative to the scale set on the WS with the Radar MASTER status. With
the further switching of the scale on the WS with the Radar MASTER, on the WS with the Radar SLAVE status
the scale value will be synchronised.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
201
Radar Adjustment in the Absence of Targets
Performance Monitor mode (see Performance Monitor paragraph) can be used for the radar tuning in the
absence of targets. To do this, use GAIN, SEA and RAIN indicator controls to achieve the maximum clarity of
the noise ring display.
TUNE indicator control buttons are used for achieving its maximum width.
Radar Reflectors and Beacons
Reflectors are designed to give maximum return from radar transmissions and can be fitted to buoys to aid
navigation, to sundry features such as dangerous outcrops of rocks, and to any hazard that would impair the
navigation of a vessel. Small boats may also have reflectors fitted to increase the boat’s detection range.
Radar beacons produce a specific, coded signal response when the radar transmission interrogates the
beacon. The reflected signal then gives precise echo paint on the PPI presentation.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
202
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Operation for SART Detection
Attention! A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a
range of approximately 8 NM. It will not be seen on S-Band (10 cm) radar.
General
Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete
radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 usec) through the band before
beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 usec) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is
repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match
that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the SART is within range,
the frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a
line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 NM will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 NM, the radar display may show also the 12 responses
generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 NM,
will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the
original dots.
Radar Range Scale
When looking for a SART it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 nautical mile range scale. This is because the
total displayed length of the SART response of 12 (or 24) dots may extend approximately 9.5 nautical miles
beyond the position of the SART and it is necessary to see a number of response dots to distinguish the SART
from other responses.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
203
SART Range Errors
When responses from only the 12 slow frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART is at a range greater
than about 1 NM), the position at which the first dot is displayed may be as much as 0.64 NM beyond the
true position of the SART. When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of
these will be no more than 150 metres beyond the true position.
Radar Bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched with the range scale and the
associated pulse length. Narrow bandwidths of 3–5 MHz are used with long pulses on long range scales and
wide bandwidths of 10–25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges.
A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it is preferable to use a
medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART.
Radar Ghost Echoes
As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the SART responses as a series of
arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although it may be
operationally useful to observe the ghost echoes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and
also they will confirm that the SART is near to own ship.
Detuning the Radar
To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter conditions, the radar may be detuned to reduce the clutter
without reducing the SART response. Radar with automatic frequency control may not permit manual
detune of the equipment. Care should be taken in operating the radar in the detuned condition as other
wanted navigational and anti-collision information may be removed. The tuning should be returned to
normal operation as soon as possible (see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). RADAR User
Manual, Chapter 2, section Initial Radar Setup , paragraph Radar Receiver Tuning).
Gain
For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range detection should be used, i.e. with
a light background noise speckle visible.
Anti-clutter Sea Control
For optimum range SART detection, this control should be set to the minimum. Care should be exercised as
wanted targets in sea clutter may be obscured. Note also that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the
SART response may not be detectable, irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case,
the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring 9.5 NM from the furthest dot back towards own
ship.
Anti-clutter Rain Control
This should be used normally (i.e. to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a SART response which,
being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the anti-clutter rain circuitry. Note that Racon
responses, which are often in the form of a long flash, will be affected by the use of this control.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
204
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Radar Trails
The trails display mode enables display of object motion history in the radar observation zone. From the
radar echo trails the navigator can assess the objects direction and speed. The displayed trail length is set by
the radar operator. It is possible to set the afterglow time within the interval of 0 to 30 minutes. If the zero
afterglow time is set, the echo trails are not displayed on the PPI. Echo trails are shown in the blue colour.
The echo trail display function is available in all the orientation modes.
The Trails mode falls into the category of collision avoidance aids. Relative trails allow assessing the ship
approach to other objects. True trails allow the objects motion relative to the own ship to be assessed.
Mode Characteristics
Trail length:
l
Maximum trail accumulation time – 30 min.;
l
Trail length change step – 1 min.
Display modes:
l
Own ship relative motion (RM): True trails, Relative trails;
l
Own ship true motion (TM): True trails, Relative trails.
True trails cannot be displayed unless there is a stabilisation mode: stabilisation relative to the water and
stabilisation relative to the shore.
Relative trails can be displayed in the absence of the radar image stabilisation, i.e., when the navigation data
is not available.
Trails are not dropped with a switch of the radar overlay display modes: change of stabilisation, change of the
Own Ship Motion Mode (HUP, CUP, NUP); switch between the relative (TM) and true (RM) motion;
offcentring.
The RADAR task ensures saving of the accumulated trails with the radar scale change of +/- 1 step from the
current one. As the scale changes by a larger number of steps, the trails are dropped and the accumulation
process starts anew.
Attention! After the trails have been dropped, the trail length does not correspond to the time interval
setting its length in the Vectors/Trails window until the expiry of this time interval which starts at the drop time.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
205
The following types of the Trails mode can be used:
l
Relative Motion
– True Trails:
l
Relative Motion
– Relative Trails:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
206
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
True Motion
– True Trails:
Note: Stationary objects do not leave marks.
l
True Motion
– Relative Trails.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
207
Trail Display Control
The displayed trail time is set in the Control Panel Vectors/Trails window.
To drop the accumulated trails manually you should change the radar scale by more than two steps, i.e.,
from the 6 mile scale switch to 24 or 1.5 miles, and then set the required scale. The accumulation of echo
trails is also dropped if the zero afterglow time is set.
Mode Use Limitations
When the ship is moving in the restricted waters with many coasts close by, the shore trails may appear due
to the change of the radar shadow zones. In a situation like this, it is advisable to set short trail accumulation
time.
In the presence of a large amount of uncompensated sea and/or rain clutter, the screen may be flared with
false trails. In this case, it is necessary to perform manual adjustment of the clutter suppression controls: SEA
and RAIN.
Parallel Index Lines
These are own ship stabilised lines which extended across the width of the PPI. The angle to, and distance
from own ship is adjustable. By setting PI lines to channel boundaries, it is possible to get a view of own ship
position compared to the channel boundaries. Four PI lines can be displayed simultaneously in MFD. With
the PI display turned off (buttons with PI numbers on the Display Panel are released) the bearing and
distance values are not displayed. With the aid of the Reset PI button, the index line is set parallel to the own
ship heading.
Variable Range Marker (VRM)
An own ship stabilised ring cantered on own ship. The radius (representing distance from own ship) is
variable. The range of an active VRM is displayed in the EBL-VRM window.
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)
A movable line extending from own ship position to the edge of the PPI. The bearing of an active EBL is shown
in the EBL-VRM window. This is a relative bearing in Head Up presentation mode and a true bearing in North
Up and Course Up.
Radar Picture Referencing
In the RADAR task, the radar scan centre is referenced to the radar antenna installation position, which is set
in the System Configuration utility (see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I ,
Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings). Targets’ data transmitted to the output also
contain information on targets relative to the radar antenna position.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
208
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The antenna position is shown on the ship symbol.
With a change of the radar picture source, e.g., after the X-band/S-band switch, the radar scan centre will be
re-referenced to the relevant radar antenna. The radar antenna position data is stored in the computer
memory and is not deleted when it is turned off.
The PPI centre is brought into coincidence with the common reference point (for more details see Chapter 2,
section Navigational Sensors, paragraph Consistent Common Reference System), which the following values are
measured from:
l
EBL;
l
VRM;
l
Range rings;
l
Vectors;
l
Heading line;
l
Range scale;
l
Cursor;
l
Tracking data.
To measure ranges and bearing relative to some other ship point, use the EBL/VRM.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
209
Performance Monitor
25/30 kW Scanner
This capability is used to verify if some radar transceiver performances are under minimum values. To switch
on Performance Monitor mode, press PM button on Radar-Scanner page of Settings panel. 24 mile range scale
should be set on the radar. In this state the radar transceiver transmits with Long Pulse and a noise ring is
displayed at approximately 24 nm.
Typical distance value, measured with VRM, is around 24 nm and it is proportional to the transmitted output
power of the radar transceiver. When the magnetron have decreased 10 dB in peak power, the ring’s
distance will decrease to 12 nm range.
A missing angular sector is present inside the noise ring. This sector, usually between 60º and 100º, is due by
real antenna transmitted radio frequency beam. Any antenna output radio frequency power degradation
reflects in a narrower angular ring interruption. When the angular sector reduces below 30º the antenna or
the waveguide need service operations.
Width is proportional to tuning condition. With proper tuning setting width reaches maximum dimension.
Strength is the difference between background noise and ring’s noise and is related to the receiver noise
figure. When receive noise figure degradation is more than 10 dB the performance monitor ring is not
distinguishable from background noise anymore. A possible cause of this fault is the intermediate frequency
unit.
10 kW Scanner
Performance monitor mode is used on a scale of 24 NM. By visualisation on PPI of 4 markers shaped arc of a
circle, which are centred on bearing of PM unit. The performance monitor carries out on radar at the same
time the following controls:
l
Control of efficiency of radar transmission system;
l
Control of efficiency of radar reception system.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
210
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Control of Efficiency of Radar Transmission System
During normal operation of transmission system, the 4 markers, set respectively to 14, 16, 18, 20 mile, must
be visible on display unit.
The degradation of the transmitted power is marked through a shift of 4 markers towards the centre of
display unit; in particular a shift of 4 markers of 2 NM towards the centre of radar display unit is obtained by
each degradation of the transmitted power corresponding to 2 dB.
In the extreme condition corresponding to a degradation of equal or greater power to 10 dB, the 4 markers
will appear at a distance on the display unit of 4, 6, 8, 10 NM.
Control of Efficiency of Radar Reception System
Adjust the radar gain so to obtain a floor noise just visible. When the radar is working correctly, the 4 arcs
must be recognisable, especially the arc farther must be hardly recognisable by floor noise.
The 4 markers are visualised with decreasing intensity levels beginning from marker nearest to that farthest
by the monitor centre.
Each jump of intensity indicates a decrement of 3 dB in reception.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
211
If sensibility of receiver decreases of 10 dB, the marker nearest to radar centre will be just recognisable above
noise.
In the extreme condition corresponding to a degradation of equal or greater power to 0 dB of transmitter
and receiver, only one marker will appear at a distance on the display unit of 4 NM.
Mute (Blank) Sectors
A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweeps, over it does not transmit radar. This is commonly
used to prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ship’s superstructure or funnel to prevent radar
reflections.
In MFD, it is possible to set two sectors where the radar transmission is turned off. The position and width of
these sectors are set, and the use of this functionality is started on Radar-Scanner page of Settings panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
212
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
On the PPI, blank sectors are delineated with dotted green coloured lines.
If the set sectors are intersecting, the PPI shows one summary sector.
Radar Maps
Radar Maps Display
For radar maps, maps created and saved in the ECDIS task, or charts created in the MFD in the standalone
configuration, are used. The radar maps are displayed if loaded, and if their display is enabled. Radar maps
and electronic charts can be simultaneously displayed on the PPI. On the PPI, radar maps are shown as a
transparent layer with radar map objects plotted onto it. This layer is superimposed on top of the radar
information and chart layer (see also paragraph On-PPI Image Formation Principle ).
Conditions of Displaying Radar Maps
Radar maps are not displayed unless the correct own ship coordinate values (PSN) and heading from the gyro
(HDG) are available. If this data disappears, in minute radar maps stop to be displayed on the PPI.
Combining Radar Overlay
Purpose of the Mode
The Combining Radar Overlay mode is intended for providing circular radar scan in the case when individual
radars have blind sectors. The mode is available where there are 2 and more radars in the navigation system.
Combining can be applied to both, scanners with control (Radar MASTER status) and scanners without
control (Radar SLAVE status).
To use the mode, you should select any of the system’s WS’s, in this case the rest of stations operate in the
standard mode. The mode cannot be run on the station which has the Radar MASTER status for two
scanners which are used as the radar data sources.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
213
Mode Operation
The mode functioning is ensured by combining the radar pictures from the selected sources (only 2 sources
can be assigned) to form a single field. As this is done, a signal of the master radar in the combination zone is
fully replaced with a signal from the other radar. This is how the synthetic radar picture providing an all-round
coverage of the scan area (0–360 degrees) is formed.
The obtained synthetic picture is subjected to the signal digital processing for clutter suppression and
extraction of useful signals, the set clutter suppression parameters (Gain, Rain, Sea, Accumulation settings,
etc., see Video Signal Processing Principles above) used for both radars.
The radar selection and setting of the width of combining sector are made on System page of Settings panel.
The use of this functionality is started by the button in the Display Panel button group. On the PPI, merge
sector is delineated with dotted green coloured lines.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
214
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Recommendations on the Use of the Mode
For the sources of the combining radar overlay formation you should choose radars of the same band: 2 Xband radars, or 2 S-band radars. It is advisable to use radar scales which are close to each other, otherwise
there may be deterioration of the combined picture.
Both radars’ digital signal level should be the same. This is achieved through the correct transceiver and radar
processor adjustment (for RIB6 amplification/shift see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340).
Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section Radar Adjustment , paragraph Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6).
Mode Operation Limitations
For the normal combination mode operation, special attention should be paid to the accuracy of the
transceiver position adjustment (see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I ,
Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 3), and to the accuracy of the
bearing/distance offset adjustment, to the transceiver tuning quality (see Multi-Functional Displaydocument
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section Radar Adjustment ).
When signals from transceivers with different bands (X-band and S-band) and/or different power are
combined, there may be blurring of the image, indistinct matching on the merge limit, drop of ARPA targets
as the merge limit is crossed.
The signal combination does not depend on the station status (Radar MASTER/SLAVE), but it is impossible to
combine a picture on a station which is a Radar MASTER for both transceivers.
When pictures are combined in the mode of the Radar MASTER/SLAVE or Radar SLAVE/SLAVE which have
different quantizing operation (differing range/pulse), there may be indistinct matching on the merge limit,
absence of a signal, drop of ARPA targets as the merge limit is crossed.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
215
The blanking mode is set for a WS with the Radar MASTER status only, and there may be a signal in a blanking
zone if the combination area covers it.
RADAR User Configurations
There may be Local and Bridge User Configuration. The Local User Configuration is an aggregate of SW and
GUI settings applicable to the Navi-Sailor and Navi-Radar applications on each station. The Bridge User
Configuration is a set of selected local configurations which can be applied simultaneously when the Bridge
User Configuration is loaded. All the configurations are synchronized among the bridge stations.
This functionality permits prompt loading of the previously created RADAR task setting configurations on the
local station.
In the RADAR task, the Bridge User Configuration cannot be created or loaded, even if the RADAR task is the
Navigational MASTER. This also refers to Navi-Radar 4000 standalone, therefore, for such configuration of
MFD the Bridge User Configuration is not available.
When the Local User Configuration is saved, the following information is retained:
l
Orientation (Head Up, North Up or Course Up) ;
l
Motion mode ( Relative or True);
l
Range;
l
Stabilization
l
True/Relative vectors;
l
True/Relative trails;
l
Past position;
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
216
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
Brilliance panel (following settings only: Brightness, Contrast, General, Targets, Rings, ERBL, GZ, Infill and
Objects)
l
AIS – on/off;
l
ARPA – on/off;
l
MAP – on/off;
l
CHART – on/off;
l
Predictor panel (time, points);
l
Off cent – on/off;
l
Radar rings – on/off;
l
Show target number – on/off;
l
Show route – on/off;
l
Interference rejection – on/off;
l
Enhanced video – on/off.
The created RADAR Local User Configuration can be exported/imported with the aid of the Data Tool utility
(the User Configuration file group). For the procedure of copying files in the external storage (see document
Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Utilities, Chapter 2, section Processing of Data Files by Data Tool Utility,
paragraph Copying Data from an External Carrier and Copying Data onto External Carrier). As the Bridge User
Configuration is imported, the Local User Configuration for each application will automatically be assigned to
its own group.
Also built into the product are default Local User Configurations for RADAR task which can be copied by using
the Data Tool utility (User Configurationfeature, Default file group) for subsequent use.
The saved user configurations can be copied and restored during the product upgrade. The configuration file
can also be saved and copied to the USB.
Indications in RADAR Task
In the MFD, the RADAR task implements indications and important indications (see Chapter 4, section
Indications) that are regulated by standards IEC 61174 ed.4 and IEC 62288 ed.2.
Indications are shown in the Indications window on the Control panel. The window displays the most recently
generated indication.
As a new indication appears, the drop-down list button displays the
familiarizing yourself with all the indications.
sign. Press the button for
In the absence of indications, the Indications window displays the “No Indications” notation.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Radar Features
217
The following indications are implemented in the RADAR task:
l
No ENC available - if the area covered by the PPI includes waters for which no ENC on a scale appropriate
for navigation is available;
l
Overscale - if the own ship position is covered by an ENC whose original scale is smaller than the current
scale of the PPI.
The important indication connected with the filters On or Off status is displayed in the AIS filter/Association
window on the Control panel:
l
Sleeping AIS targets filter and filter for the display of different AIS target types (for the description of the
AIS filter, see Chapter 8, section Display of AIS Targets, paragraph General Information):
o
- filter is turned Off;
o
- there is letter "F" in the box, the filter is turned On.
If the AIS button is pressed, the AIS page of the TARGETS panel on the Control panel will promptly open.
l
Filter for the generation of the Wxx Lost Tgt ID warning upon the loss of an AIS or ARPA target (for the
description of the AIS filter, see Chapter 8, section Display of AIS Targets, paragraph Lost AIS Targets and
section Display of ARPA Targets, paragraph Lost Targets):
o
o
- filter is turned Off (Enable "Lost tgt" warning checkbox is checked);
- there is letter "W" in the box, the filter is turned On (Enable "Lost tgt"
warning checkbox is unchecked).
If both filters are turned on at the same time, the box displays the letters "FW":
The important indication connected with disabling of the Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm generation is displayed
in the CPA/Target Past Position window of the Control Panel (for the description of this alarm generation see
Chapter 8, section Display of AIS Targets, paragraph Dangerous AIS Targets and section Display of ARPA Targets,
paragraphs Collision Avoidance and Dangerous ARPA Targets):
l
- dangerous target alarm generation is turned on;
- the box displays the letters "Off" meaning that the dangerous target
alarms generation is disabled (both the CPA and TCPA values are set to 0).
l
If the CPA button is pressed, the Acquisition page of the TARGETS panel on the Control panel will promptly
open up for editing the CPA/TCPA parameters.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
218
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Display of ARPA Targets
Targets Tracking Limitations
There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target tracking functions:
l
Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target tracking:
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent targets during
automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to 0.05 NM. If multiple targets
approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM and this may cause the system to regard
them as one target and thus to swap them or lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also
occur if the picture of the target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter
returns or moves very close to land.
l
Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function:
The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlation ship, and the target will thus be lost if
certain conditions are fulfilled (see paragraph ARPA Targets Acquisition and Drop from Tracking below). If a
lost target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target. If, however,
radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter returns or other noise may be erroneously detected
and tracked as a target, and resulting, a false alarm may be issued.
l
Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking:
To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary first to appropriately adjust the GAIN, SEA and RAIN
dials of the radar so that the target to be acquired and tracked is clearly displayed on the radar display.
Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability/accuracy of automatic tracking.
l
Navigational data (Gyro, LOG, COG\SOG) reliability and accuracy:
The target parameter calculations accuracy depends on the accuracy of data from the devices interfaced
with the radar system.
The ARPA display mode is not available in the following cases:
l
ARPA button OFF;
l
Gyro data not available or invalid;
l
Log data not available or invalid;
l
ARPA option not licensed;
l
Transceiver in STBY mode.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of ARPA Targets
219
Collision Avoidance
The collision avoidance task is of current importance in the intensive shipping conditions.
The essence of the task is reduced to eliminating the possibility of two moving objects appearing in one and
the same spatial point at one and the same time. The collision avoidance facilities, therefore, are required to
solve two problems: to predict the possibility of a collision and to develop recommendations for preventing
this situation – imitation of the collision avoidance manoeuvre.
The safety zone for the own ship is a circle of a set radius (CPA – closest point of approach). This value
depends on the own ship characteristics (dimensions, loading) and current weather conditions (wind force,
current speed). The target which may turn up within this circle represents a collision danger and is referred to
as a dangerous target. Closely associated with the CPA parameter is a time interval to the dangerous
approach moment (TCPA time to CPA) – during this time the navigator is required to perform a collision
avoidance manoeuvre as per the current regulations.
The CPA and TCPA parameters are calculated on the basis of ship speed measurements. The radar ensures
automatic calculations of necessary parameters – this equipment is called the ARPA (automatic radar plotting
aids). Based on the results of the radar observation of the space, the targets relative speeds and courses are
calculated. Data on the own ship course and speed allows the targets motion true parameters to be calculated.
The measured data can be presented in different ways:
l
Display of true or relative target vectors in the graphic form;
l
Display of the targets history in the form of trails or discrete marks (Past posn);
l
Display of measured and calculated parameters in the text form.
To simplify solution of the collision avoidance problem, the MFD implements the trial manoeuvre function.
This section describes the ARPA functionality: ways to acquire the targets for tracking, limitations on the use
of tracking facilities, factors affecting the tracking quality and the trial manoeuvre facilities.
ARPA Targets Acquisition and Drop from Tracking
Attention! There is no target acquisition at a distance of 1-2 cables (dead zone).
The target can be acquired in the following modes:
l
Manually by the operator;
l
Automatically when within the guard zone(s) set by the operator.
The radar target is acquired by the ARPA if it is detected 3 times in three consecutive antenna revolutions. If
when acquired, the target is steadily observed in any five out of 10 consecutive scans, it is considered to be
steadily tracked three minute after the acquisition.
The ARPA is implemented so that it can track targets as per IEC62388 requirements for radars (up to 45
revolutions) installed on high speed crafts (HSC).
The target acquisition and tracking depend on Gain, Sea and Rain settings, as the target is extracted after the
video signal processing (see Video Signal Processing Principles section).
Not more than 80 ARPA targets can be tracked at the same time. This should be taken into account when
using Guard Zones, since in the automatic acquisition, a large number of false targets can be acquired.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
220
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The ratios signal-to-noise and signal-to-clutter depending on the sea, rain and snow condition as well as low
clouds is to be considered as important factors affecting the target’s acquisition and tracking. The larger values
of the above ratios, the better an acquisition quality and the more stable the tracking is. The target’s acquisition
and the following tracking are ensured when probability of the target’s mark detection is equal to 0.8 or higher.
When the ratio signal-to-noise reaches value of 10 dB or higher, the required precision characteristics are met.
The tracking of the stable target is ensured when probability of the target’s mark detection is equal to 0.5 or
higher. Target’s glint, rolling and pitching are affecting both acquisition and tracking of target. Errors of gyro,
log, bearing and range quantization, beam shape, pulse shape and antenna backlash affect in more degree to
the precision characteristics of tracked targets. The larger values of the above errors, the worse the precision
parameters.
Positional relationship of the targets may also affect the acquisition and tracking. In the case of proximity of
two targets, one of them might be lost in the course of automatic or manual acquisition; the recurring
acquisition of the lost target can be done after considerable divergence of targets. In the case of proximity of
two steadily tracked targets, the tracks confusion may take place in individual cases.
The tracking is cancelled, and the target is considered to be lost according to the following algorithm:
l
Up to 1 minute after the acquisition – target missed 6 times;
l
From 1 to 3 minutes after the acquisition – target missed 11 times;
l
3 and more minutes after the acquisition – target missed 18 times.
Display and Naming of ARPA Targets
Symbols of ARPA targets are displayed on the PPI in accordance with the following rules:
l
l
Acquired targets are shown in the form of a dashed line circle centered at the position of target
acquisition;
Steadily tracked targets are shown as yellow coloured thick solid line circles 3 mm in diameter
(when the yellow radar overlay is selected, these targets are displayed in the green colour).
An acquired target is automatically given an ID number. The numbering starts with 1. Every new target is
given the next number (the maximum is 80). If a target is lost, some unoccupied numbers appear, which are
then not assigned to new targets until the maximum number is reached.
If the number of targets exceeds 95% of the maximum number of targets,the 95% ARPA capacity caution is
generated (for alerts description see Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Target
Alerts).
With the number of targets decreasing to less than 85%, this caution is disappears (s).
If the number of targets exceeds the maximum number of targets, the 100% ARPA capacity warning is generated.
Dangerous ARPA Targets
Considered dangerous are CPA/TCPA values, which are simultaneously equal to or smaller than safe
CPA/TCPA value set by the user in the Acquisition page of TARGETS panel of the Control Panel. As a dangerous
target appears, Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt "ID" alarm is triggered off.
The symbol of a dangerous target is a red coloured 5 mm diameter circles.
The symbol of the dangerous target is flashing until Wxx CPA/TCPA Tg t ID alarm is acknowledged.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of ARPA Targets
221
Vectors of ARPA Targets
Vectors indicates the projected direction and speed of a tracked target. The end of the target vector
represents where that target will be in “n” minutes (where “n” represents the vector time set in the
Vectors/Trails window) if the target holds current speed and course. Vectors are normally displayed in the
current motion mode (true or relative), but it is possible to display relative vectors in true motion and vice
versa by changing the vector mode in the Vectors/Trails window.
Pre-calculated motion vectors can be displayed in all the motion indication and display presentation modes.
Vectors of ARPA targets are displayed automatically for all the acquired targets if a non-zero
value is set. The minute notch is not shown unless a certain vector length is set.
With the selection of true motion vectors, the own ship and targets’ motion relative to the water or ground is
shown. If relative motion vectors are selected, the targets’ motion is shown relative to the own ship, whereas
the own ship motion vector is not displayed.
Vectors are shown in yellow colour (when the yellow radar overlay is selected, the vectors are displayed in the
green colour). Vectors of dangerous targets are shown in the red colour.
Selected Target
Selected/current target is that target which the current information is displayed for in Target Information
panel/data card. Only two targets can be selected at each individual moment of time.
The target stops to be selected/current if:
l
The target is lost;
l
The user has selected (activated) another (the third) target.
The selected targets’ symbols, vectors and names are displayed in accordance with the
general rules described above for the AIS and ARPA targets. At this stage, the selected
targets’ symbols are enclosed in a “broken” purple box:
The ARPA target data card may look as follows:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
222
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Guard Zones
Two guard zones can be defined. Parameters of the Guard Zones are counted from the scanner. The user can
set the dimensions of these zones. The following limitations are imposed in this case:
l
The distance to the inner boundary of the Guard Zone shall not be less than 0.1 miles;
l
The dimensions of the Guard Zone shall not be less than 5º by angle and less than 0.5 miles by width.
As a target enters a guard zone, the Wxx GZ Tgt ID warning is generated. Before the warning
acknowledgement, ARPA targets are shown as follows:
l
l
l
Radar targets in acquisition state acquired automatically in the Guard zone, are shown as a
flashing red 5 mm diameter dashed line circle;
The steadily tracked targets acquired automatically in the Guard zone, are shown as a flashing
red 3 mm diameter thick solid line circle;
The steadily tracked targets in the Guard Zone, are shown as a flashing yellow (green) 3 mm
diameter thick solid line circle.
The symbol is flashing until Wxx GZ Tgt ID warning is acknowledged.
Boundaries of the ring shaped zones are set by using the cursor. There may be the following setting options:
l
Change of the ring width;
l
Circular motion of the zone relative to the own ship mark (without changes in the dimensions or shape);
l
Change of the coverage angle;
l
Moving the zone closer to or farther from the own ship mark (with a change of the zone width).
Past Position
Plots the past position of targets by dropping a marker to indicate the target’s position up to selected
plotting interval.
By default displayed past position of tracked APRA and active AIS target. If necessary, the user can turn on
the display of sleeping AIS targets (see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). RADAR User Manual,
Chapter 4, section Handling AIS Targets, paragraph Filtering AIS Targets).
With the selection of the targets’ track plotting interval, the displayed track length is set automatically:
l
30 sec – 6 minutes (12 points);
l
1 min – 12 minutes (12 points);
l
2 min – 24 minutes (12 points);
l
4 min – 48 minutes (12 points).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of ARPA Targets
223
The function for the display of the targets past position points is available in all the display presentation and
motion modes.
The true and relative tracks of the steadily tracked targets are formed for all the time intervals between the
points, and are available for display at any moment of time. The number of points depends on the target
tracking time and the plotting interval setting.
True or relative track is selected depending on the target vector type (R vect, T vect) and stabilisation (Sea
Stab, Ground Stab):
l
R vect and Sea Stab – relative track through the water;
l
R vect and Ground Stab – relative track over ground;
l
T vect and Sea Stab – true track through the water;
l
T vect and Ground Stab – true track over ground.
Lost Targets
A lost target is shown as a red coloured crossed lines centred on the target symbol.
Effective for the lost ARPA targets are filter settings on the Acquisition page of the TARGETS panel.
With the Enable "Lost tgt" warning checkbox is unchecked, ARPA targets stop to be displayed on the PPI
immediately after the timeout expiry.
With the Enable "Lost tgt" warning checkbox is checked, ARPA targets which are not within the circle of a
radius specified in the filter settings, stop to be displayed on the PPI immediately after the timeout expiry.
Applicable to the ARPA targets within the circle, after 30 seconds the timeout expiry, or after the warning
acknowledgement, the display of the ARPA lost target is stopped.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
224
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Trial Manoeuvre
Trial Manoeuvre function is intended for improving safety of sailing in the waters with intensive ship traffic. It
can be used for calculating the own ship safe manoeuvre parameters (course, speed, start time). The Trial
Manoeuvre operating concept consists in correlating target motion lines and the planned own ship motion
line with the selection of different parameters of the intended manoeuvre, like a new ship course, new ship
speed, time to the manoeuvre start and the ship turn radius.
The function is controlled from Trial Manoeuvre page of TRIAL/TGT Simulator panel. The program allows the
following parameters to be set on the display:
l
The ship course after the manoeuvre start. This is done in Set CTW input window by using the keyboard,
trackball/mouse or
l
Own ship speed after the manoeuvre start. This is done in Set SPD input window by using the keyboard,
trackball/mouse or
l
l
l
l
buttons;
buttons;
Own ship turn radius in Radius input window (from 0.1 to 9.9 miles);
Length of the own ship and targets’ planned motion lines in the trial manoeuvre in Trial line input window
(from 1 to 24 minutes);
Time to the manoeuvre start in Delay input window (from 1 to 23 minutes). The Delay parameter can be
entered in both minutes and miles. Re-calculations use the ship’s current SOG, in case if ground
stabilisation selected; or STW, if sea stabilisation selected. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the
length of the set own ship motion line and is automatically corrected if it does;
For the loading condition the value selected in the bottom part of the panel. The buttons are available if
the RADAR task is the Navigation MASTER. Otherwise, a value set on the Navigation MASTER is taken.
Trial Manoeuvre can also be turned on by using Play button on the control display. In this mode, the turn
radius, own ship new speed and length of the own ship planned motion line are entered from the Control
Panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of ARPA Targets
225
The own ship new course and time to the manoeuvre start are changed by using the trackball/mouse in the
following way:
l
l
The trackball/mouse up and down motion increases/decreases respectively the value of the time before
the manoeuvre;
The trackball/mouse motion to the left and to the right decreases/increases respectively the new course
value.
The values of these parameters are displayed dynamically on the appropriate boxes on the Control Panel.
After a press on the Show button, the PPI displays the expected motion line (true or relative, in accordance
with selected mode of vectors displaying) of the own ship and of the targets (ARPA and AIS).
The bottom part of the PPI displays a flashing white “T” letter.
For the own ship, the EML is divided with dashes, each of them standing for a distance covered in one
minute, and six-minute intervals being marked with a notch, whilst the manoeuvre delay time is shown with
digits in the intended manoeuvre start point. The EML of targets is divided into minutes only.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
226
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The conjectured own ship track and targets EMLs shown in different colours depending on the availability of
a dangerous approach to other vessels. In this case:
l
l
Green segments show that no dangerous approach is expected;
Red segments show that an approach is expected at a distance which is less than the set CPA and TCPA
values.
In the speed manoeuvre calculations, it is assumed that the main engine operating mode at the manoeuvre
start moment (Delay parameter) will be set in the position selected in the Set SPD window, and that, as the
result of the manoeuvre, the speed cannot become negative. Enabling of the trial manoeuvring with speed
alteration is performed by Set SPD button. There may be the following main engine operating modes:
l
Full;
l
Half;
l
Slow;
l
Dead Slow;
l
Stop.
Notations corresponding to the main engine ahead speed operation are shown in the green colour, astern
and STOP in the red colour.
If the Set SPD button is depressed, it is assumed that there will be no speed manoeuvre, and the ship will be
proceeding at the current speed (the black notation “None” is shown).
Attention! During trial manoeuvring with speed alteration, the calculation error may run up to 15%.
Manoeuvre calculations use the Pilot Card data on the ship manoeuvring characteristics when loaded and in
ballast, which is entered in the System Configuration utility at the installation stage (see document MultiFunctional Display (v. 3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I ). To select the ship loading option for the Trial
Manoeuvre calculations, use the Loaded, Medium and In Ballast buttons on the Trial Manoeuvre page of the
TRIAL/TGT Simulator panel.
Note: The buttons are available if the RADAR task is the Navigation MASTER. Otherwise, a value set on the
Navigation MASTER is taken.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of ARPA Targets
227
If turn parameters are entered whereby the manoeuvre cannot be displayed within the set line length, i.e.
there is no way of representation of the point of turning to the set course on the PPI, Invalid parameters
warning appears in the bottom part of the display. Lines with such parameters are not displayed on the Chart
panel.
Until the Drop button is pressed, the own ship EML is moving on the PPI together with the own ship mark.
After a press on the button, the manoeuvre is recorded, and the EML is linked to the PPI. As the ship is
moving, the number of minutes to the turn decreases. Last minute before manoeuvre commence is
displayed on PPI to tenths of a minute. As this occurs, the total length of the line remains equal to that set by
the operator on TRIAL/TGT Simulator panel. If some manoeuvre parameters are changed in the Drop mode,
the mode is turned off.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
228
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Curved Heading Line
The Curved Headline (CHL) has two operational inputs:
l
the next Course CTW i.e. the course that will be set on the autopilot;
l
the Radius that will be used during the turning set in nm.
In addition the Length of the Estmated Motion Line (EML) can be set in NM and Delay NM (only used in drop
mode ) can be set.
The purpose of CHL is to visualize the next maneuver where course and radius can be set by numeric input or
using the trackball and “grab” the course line or radius to increase or decrease the values.
When CHL aligns with the next intended course line operator can start the turn by making the manual input
of the heading change on the autopilot or give the corresponding order to helmsman.
A fixed value for the F-distance is set in Config menu. F-distance is the difference between WOL and start of
the turn. A correctly adjusted F-distance assure that vessel will end up on the next course line with minimum
deviation XTD.
F-distance can be predefined for three loading conditions.
The input can either be done by operator in ECDIS or RADAR by means of using the trackball this is what we
can call NORMAL mode.
There is also a possibility take the information from the vessels AUTO PILOT see below.
There are two functional modes CARRY and DROP.
Carry Mode
The normal is to use Carry mode, where the radius starts in a position ahead of the ship equal to F-distance
with the given next course and radius to be used.
Settings can be done well in time before the turn the it is just to wait until CHL is align with the intended new
course line.
In Carry mode the CHL is presented in BLUE color.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of ARPA Targets
229
Drop Mode
In drop mode the CTW and Radius is set well in time the CHL is moved forward by means of using the Delay
input field.
Set delay so that CHL is close to the next Course line.
When CHL aligns with new Course line change from Carry to Drop mode.
CHL will now change color to magenta.
When the vessel approach the WOL the turn shall be started by means of setting the course manually on AP
or given the appropriate order to the helmsman.
CHL Auto Pilot Mode
In CHL menu there is a radio button AP ON/OFF.
When AP is set to ON it is not possible to change the CHL settings by means of the Trackball. CHL will no
present the settings done in the AUTO PILOT.
This can be done in two ways:
1. Direct (DODGE) Mode, when operator change CTW or RADIUS on AP the value of CHL in ECDIS/ARPA is
changed and presented in the display.
This allows the operator to immediate see where the vessel will end up after the set maneuver. This is not
a prediction as it does not take into account drift ect, but operator can monitor vessels motion relative
the CHL.
2. Planning Mode, if the autopilot includes a function for preprogramming of next CTW and radius the
values for CHL will be displayed in ECDIS/ARPA.
Operator can then monitor vessels motion. When CHL is aligned with next intended Course line start of
turn can be executed on the Autopilot.
Note: There is no possibility to set or alter course or radius from ECDIS or ARPA.
This can only be done if vessel is equipped with Certified Track Control System.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
230
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Simulator Targets
The MFD provides a capability to set up to 10 simulator targets on the TGT Simulator page of the TRIAL/TGT
Simulator panel. If at least one such target is set, the bottom part of the PPI displays a flashing white “X” letter.
Display of AIS Targets
General Information
The MFD processes and displays “Vessels class A&B” type AIS targets only (VDM 1, 2, 3, 5, 18, 19 sentences);
information on these targets is received by the AIS transponder without any limitations. These targets
transmit information with the intervals specified in the following tables.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of AIS Targets
231
Table 1. Class A Shipborne Mobile Equipment Reporting Intervals.
Type of Ship
Reporting interval
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots
3 min
Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots
10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 0–14 knots
10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 0–14 knots and changing course
3 1/3 sec
Ship with a speed of between 14–23 knots
6 sec
Ship with a speed of between 14–23 knots and changing course
2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots
2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots and changing course
2 sec
Table 2. Reporting Intervals For Equipment Other Than Class A Shipborne Mobile Equipment.
Platform's Condition
Nominal reporting interval
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment not moving faster than 2 knots
3 min
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 2–14 knots
30 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 14–23 knots
15 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving > 23 knots
5 sec
Search and Rescue aircraft (airborne mobile equipment)
10 sec
Aids to Navigation
3 min
AIS base station
10 sec
These targets are not displayed unless the own ship coordinates are available (Lat/Lon), as AIS target position
is referenced to the absolute geographic coordinates.
Attention! Up to 1024 AIS targets can be processed simultaneously. AIS targets are processed in turn, so
there may be a loss of a target due to the excessive traffic.
If the number of targets exceeds 95% of the maximum number of targets,the 95% AIS capacity caution is
generated (for alerts description see Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Target
Alerts).
With the number of targets decreasing to less than 85%, this caution is disappears (s).
If the number of targets exceeds the maximum number of targets, the 100% AIS capacity warning is
generated.
After this warning has been triggered off, the operator can decrease the AIS targets processing radius (see
document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS User Manual, Chapter 10, section AIS, paragraph Handling
AIS Targets, item AIS Target Display) thus reducing the number of the processed AIS targets.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
232
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Different filters are used for reducing the number of displayed targets.
The filter is controlled from the AIS page of the TARGETS panel.
By default, the filter for sleeping AIS targets is OFF. It is possible to select criteria for filtering sleeping
AIS targets which will not be displayed on the PPI:
l
RNG – to filter targets beyond the user set limits;
l
CPA – to filter targets whose CPA is larger than the value set by the user;
l
TCPA – to filter targets whose TCPA is larger than the value set by the user.
You can also use the Display by type group to turn off presentation of the PPI (which is turned on by default)
for the following AIS target types:
l
Class A;
l
Class B;
l
AtoN;
l
Base station;
l
SAR aircraft;
l
SART;
l
Virtual AtoN.
If the sleeping AIS targets filtering is enabled, or the display of some AIS target type it turned off, an
important indication (the yellow letter "F") is displayed in the Association/AIS filter window of the Control
Panel:
Warning! It should be noted that dangerous AIS targets can also be filtered off for display with the aid of the
AIS filter. Nevertheless the Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm will be generated for AIS targets.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of AIS Targets
233
Naming of AIS Targets
Targets are named in accordance with the same rules as ARPA targets. The name of an AIS target is formed
from “T” prefix (from transponder) and its unique identifier, i.e., T1, T2, T10, etc.
AIS Target Symbol Types, Orientation
AIS targets are displayed on the PPI according to the following rules:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Sleeping AIS targets are presented as acute isosceles triangles oriented to the targets’ reported
heading (or COG if heading is not reported) and centred at the targets’ reported position. The
base of the triangles is 3 mm and the height is 4,5 mm. The triangles are drawn using a thick solid
green line;
A sleeping AIS targets with neither a reported heading nor COG are shown as a dashed-line green
coloured triangle oriented toward the top of the operational display area;
Activated AIS targets are presented as acute isosceles triangles oriented to the targets’ reported
heading (or COG if heading is not reported) and centred at the targets’ reported position. The
base of the triangles is 4 mm and the height is 6 mm. The triangles are drawn using a thick solid
green line;
If information on AIS target dimensions is available, and the current scale permitting (the
appropriate range scale is selected), AIS targets are shown in the form of a ship contour. Ship
contour is drawn around the AIS target symbol triangles relative to the targets’ reported position
according to the offsets, beam and length. The contour is drawn using a thick solid green line;
If there is no information on the target’s COG/SOG vector or the own ship’s COG/SOG vector
affecting the CPA/TCPA calculations, the AIS targets are shown as a dashed-line green coloured
triangle (contour) oriented toward the top of the operational display area;
AIS aids to navigation (ATON) are presented as a green diamond with crossed lines centred at the
reported position of the ATON;
A virtual AIS ATON has the green letter “V” superimposed on the symbol so that it does not
extend beyond the diamond and does not intersect with the crossed lines;
An AIS search and rescue transmitter (AISSART) is drawn as green circle with cross.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
234
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
AIS aids to navigation symbols:
AIS AtoN
l
Basic shape;
l
Racon;
l
Emergency wreck mark;
l
North cardinal mark;
l
East cardinal mark
l
South cardinal mark
l
West cardinal mark
l
Port hand mark
l
Starboard hand mark
l
Isolated danger
l
Safe water
l
Special mark
l
l
Physical
Virtual
Off position (AIS AtoN is indicates off position of floating aid with yellow
text “Off Posn”)
The absence of a charted physical AtoN is communicated as a combined
state of ‘virtual’ and ‘off position’. This is indicated with yellow text
“Missing” above the dotted outline diamond using colour yellow.
Target symbols are oriented along the ship’s valid gyro heading (HDG), and where the HDG is not available,
along the ship’s valid course over the ground (COG).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of AIS Targets
235
Activated and Non-Activated AIS Targets
All the AIS targets displayed on the PPI (including dangerous targets) are considered non-active (sleeping)
from the moment they are first displayed on the screen.
Sleeping targets are displayed in the form of an appropriate symbol without vectors.
The user can activate any displayed AIS target. The target is considered to be activated until:
l
l
It is deactivated manually by the user;
It is lost (in this case, if new data on the lost target arrived before its deleting, the target is considered to
be active again).
Active AIS targets are displayed as an appropriate symbol and vectors. Vectors are not displayed unless there
is relevant valid data.
Heading lines are originated at the apex of the AIS triangle. Turn indicators are presented as a
single line perpendicular to the heading line in the direction of turn.
The COG/SOG vector is shown with a dashed line whose length depends on the selected vector length value
(in minutes). In the Sea Stabilisation mode, the PPI displays CTW/STW vectors of the targets and own ship,
whereas in the Ground Stabilisation mode – COG/SOG vectors. Depending on the selected mode, true and
relative vectors can be shown.
When an AIS target is shown as a ship contour, vectors originate from its AIS antenna fixing point
(ABCD parameters).
The previously activated target can be switched to sleeping/non-active status.
The filter on the Acquisition page of the TARGETS panel is used for the automatic activation of targets.
By default, the filter for activation of sleeping AIS targets is OFF. It is possible to select criteria for sleeping
AIS targets activation:
l
RNG – to activate AIS targets beyond the user set limits;
l
CPA – to activate AIS targets whose CPA is larger than the value set by the user;
l
TCPA – to activate AIS targets whose TCPA is larger than the value set by the user.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
236
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Dangerous AIS Targets
Considered dangerous are targets whose CPA/TCPA values are both equal to or smaller than CPA/TCPA safe
values set by the user in the Acquisition page of TARGETS panel of the Control Panel.
As soon as the CPA/TCPA values become smaller than the settings, Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm is triggered off.
Each new dangerous target causes the alarm to be triggered off anew.
The symbol (contour) of a dangerous target is always shown as red coloured larger triangle,
with a base of 5 mm and a height of 7,5 mm. COG/SOG vector is shown in the red colour. HDG
vector is displayed according to the general rules for the display of an HDG vector for activated
targets and is shown in the red colour.
The dangerous target is automatically activated, and the symbol of this target is flashing until Wxx CPA/TCPA
Tgtt ID alarm is acknowledged.
AIS Target in Guard Zone
As an AIS targets gets into the GZ, Wxx GZ Tgt ID warning is generated.
The AIS targets is automatically activated and starts flickering. After the warning acknowledgement, the
flickering stops. Each new target causes to the warning to be generated anew.
Lost AIS Targets
If no data on the AIS target has been received from MFD within a certain time interval which depends on the
target category, such target is considered to be lost. The timeout for various target categories is shown in the
table below.
Category of Ship
Alarm after timeout
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots (class B not moving faster than
380 sec
2 knots)
Ship at anchor or moored and moving at more than 3 knots
41 sec
Ship 0–14 knots (class B 2–14 knots)
41 sec
Ship 0–14 knots and changing course
41 sec
Ship 14–23 knots
41 sec
Ship 14–23 knots and changing course
40 sec
Ship > 23 knots
30 sec
Ship > 23 knots and changing course
30 sec
Class B not moving faster than 2 knots
380 sec
Class B 2–14 knots
300 sec
Ship 14–23 knots
150 sec
Ship > 23 knots
50 sec
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of AIS Targets
237
Lost targets are shown on the PPI in the last accepted coordinates.
The sleeping lost AIS targets stop to be displayed on the PPI without any warning after the timeout expires.
Effective for the active AIS targets are filter settings on the Acquisition page of the TARGETS panel.
With the Enable "Lost tgt ID" warning checkbox is unchecked, AIS targets stop to be displayed on the PPI
immediately after the timeout expiry.
With the Enable "Lost tgt ID" warning checkbox is checked, AIS targets which are not within the circle of a
radius specified in the filter settings, stop to be displayed on the PPI immediately after the timeout expiry.
Applicable to the active AIS targets within the circle, after 30 seconds the timeout expiry the display of the AIS
lost target is stopped. Wxx Lost tgt ID warning is triggered off.
At this time the lost target is shown on the PPI as crossed lines centered on the AIS target symbol.
Lost AIS targets and the warning disappear automatically from the PPI 30 sec later or after the warning
acknowledgement.
Selected Target
In the absence of valid data, and/or with the invalid data available, the data card of the selected AIS target
displays “No Data” notation in the relevant boxes.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
238
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Own Ship Data
To check information transmitted by the own AIS transponder, use the AIS VDL Data tab of AIS page on the
Targets panel.
The Source line specifies the source of the own ship coordinates used by the AIS transponder for the data
transmission. External (Ext) or transponder built-in (Int) sources of coordinates can be used. The name of the
EPFS used is shown in brackets. If the RAIM mode is used, the name of the source is shown in green.
The UTC line shows the status of the time used in the AIS transponder. Time is always synchronised by the
EPFS receiver built into the transponder.
In the ROT line, the data display mode depends on the connection of the ROT sensor. If the sensor is
connected, the ROT value is shown in the “xxxº/min stb (port)” format. If there is no ROT sensor, the value is
calculated from the course alteration and may have two values: “0” or “>5º/30 s stb (port)”.
If some own ship data is not available, the word “Missing” is displayed.
Trial Manoeuvre for AIS Targets
Trial manoeuvre for the AIS targets is performed in much the same way as for the ARPA targets (see the
previous paragraph). The change of the manoeuvre parameters affects the display of the AIS target vectors
to suit the selected CPA\TCPA value. Trial manoeuvre is possible in the Tvect and Rvect modes.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of AIS Targets
239
Associating AIS and ARPA Targets
The AIS and ARPA targets are associated if both targets meet certain criteria, and it is highly probable that this
is one and the same target. The association criteria vary with the target speed:
l
for low-speed targets (below 5 knots) – target position;
l
for high-speed targets (5 knots and higher) – position and COG.
The by-position association is not possible unless the target is tracked steadily for at least 60 seconds, and for
at least 180 seconds in the case of the by-COG association.
The by-position association is made by comparing the ARPA and AIS target position in both range and
bearing. If the disagreement does not exceed a certain threshold value, targets are associated. The threshold
range value depends on the set radar scale, whereas the threshold azimuth value – on the target range.
The by-course association is made by comparing the COG of ARPA and AIS targets.
The targets are disassociated if the disagreement is more than twice the threshold value.
The targets association mode is controlled from the AIS filter/AssociationAIS filter window of the Control
Panel. To turn on the mode, press the Association button. The priority of displaying targets after the
association is selected from the drop-down list.
If ARPA target is lost, the association is disabled, and the PPI shows the AIS target only.
If the AIS functionality is disabled, or the AIS button is turned off, the association is disabled, and the PPI
shows the ARPA target only.
Turning AIS Functionality OFF
The MFD has a capability to fully turn off (disable) AIS functionality. Automatic disabling is connected with
standard requirements whereunder the operation of AIS functionality is prohibited if at least one of the
following conditions is fulfilled:
l
There is no own ship course;
l
There are no own ship coordinates;
l
STW+Drift is used for COG/SOG source;
l
ER mode (Echo Reference mode) is used for COG/SOG source;
l
DR mode is selected in the ECDIS task.
AIS functionality is, therefore, disabled automatically if these conditions are existent.
The AIS button become automatically disabled.
If all the above-mentioned conditions for the automatic disabling are eliminated, the button is enabled and
that AIS functionality mode is resumes, which was set by the user before the software disabling (e.g.,
association of AIS and ARPA targets).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
240
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
DR Mode of AIS Targets
To switch on DR mode for AIS targets, use DR for AIS targets button in Settings tab on AIS page of TARGETS
panel after the input of the minimum speed from which DR calculations are started.
In this case, the following specific features of dead reckoning for AIS targets should be taken into account:
l
l
l
Dead reckoning of targets is made from the latest data on the true course and speed (COG/SOG). As the
rate of data transmission from the targets is dependent on their speed, manoeuvring and navigation
status, time before the data arrival may be as much as 10 sec;
As the target data is updated by the transponder and the MFD, it is displayed on the screen in accordance
with the last received coordinates;
There can be no dead reckoning of AIS targets with “At anchor” and “Moored” status.
Display of Chart Information on RADAR Task
Attention! In RADAR task vector charts of TX97 and ENC formats are used only. RNC format charts are not
used in RADAR task.
Chart Loading
For a clear presentation of the sailing area and work with the chart information, it is necessary to correctly
select the navigational charts.
Chart loading is understood as the display of an electronic chart from the ship folio on the PPI. Such loaded
chart, whose number is specified on Charts page of Chart/Routes panel, is referred to as the current chart.
For an easy search and loading of the required charts, the RADAR task offers two procedures: automatic and
manual.
Chart Autoloading
Chart autoloading is a special RADAR task function, which allows the automatic display of the chart optimum
in regard of its position and scale, and defines this chart as the current chart. There may be joint display of
charts in the TX-97 and S-57 formats.
To turn this function on, press Autoload button on Charts page of Chart/Routes panel:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of Chart Information on RADAR Task
241
Chart autoloading is made under the ship position, when the ship sails beyond the current chart boundaries.
Where it is necessary to use the chart which is not loaded automatically, a special FIX function is provided.
This function is activated by selecting the necessary chart from the pull-down list with the Autoload button
depressed. As this is done, the chart autoloading is disabled and the required chart is loaded. To the right of
the Autoload button, the word “FIX” is displayed. After the ship symbol has passed the boundaries of the
fixed current chart, the autoloading mode will be turned on automatically.
Manual Chart Loading
The manual method of chart loading requires the operator to select the charts him/herself in the drop-down
list on Charts page of Chart/Routes panel.
To do this, you should first turn off the Autoload button.
Information about Charts and Chart Objects
General Chart Information
For the prompt obtaining of general information on the vector chart which whose boundaries the cursor is
currently located, the Multi-Functional Display implements Info function. To turn on Info function, use the
button: the screen displays the Info panel which shows all the necessary information. To turn off Info
function, use the right trackball button, the Close button on the Info panel or open another panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
242
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
For ENC format charts, information on the edition number and date, coordinate offset, the latest correction
date and source of editions (country) is displayed. For TX-97 format charts, information on the edition
number and date, coordinate offset, the latest correction date is displayed along with data on the source of
the paper which the vector electronic chart was made from.
ENC format charts
TX-97 format charts
Information on Chart Objects
A large number of chart objects on small screen area do not allow the display of all their associated
information. With the use of “Info” function, a free cursor for performing “acquisition” function appears in
the chart area. A press on the left trackball/mouse button in the bottom part of the screen opens up Info
panel, which displays available information on the “acquired” objects both in text and graphic form. Objects
are “acquired” by using the following procedures:
l
l
l
Point type object (lighthouse, buoy, “i” information sign, etc.) – position the marker so that the object is
within its box;
Line or area (recommended route, cables, oil pipelines, traffic separation lines, areas, etc.) – position the
marker on any line segment;
Displayed chart – position the marker on any chart point.
Information panel displays a list of acquired objects. To view the data, selected the required object from the list.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of Chart Information on RADAR Task
243
Effect of Errors on Chart Information Display Accuracy
The chart information display accuracy and correlation with the radar image is affected by the following factors:
l
Accuracy of determining coordinates with the use of a positioning system.
Accuracy of determining the position with the aid of a positioning system depends on many factors:
o
Technical characteristics of the positioning system sensor;
o
Antenna position. The satellite GPS signal can be received from any direction. To achieve the best
possible result, the antenna should be installed in the area with the largest open sky fragment (up to
the horizon). Remember that metal surfaces block the signal. Powerful transmitters (especially in the
microwave band) may corrupt the GPS signal. During the antenna installation, it is necessary, as far as
practically possible, to avoid the areas where there is focussed microwave transmission, or places close
to the powerful radars transmitting on the radio frequencies close to the values divisible by the L1
signal frequency (1575 MHz);
o
Operating mode. It should be noted that when the GPS operates in the differential mode, its standard
accuracy is < 5 metres, whereas in the ordinary mode it is < 20 metres;
o
Satellite constellation in use. It should be noted that in the polar areas (> 80 degrees) the positioning
system accuracy might deteriorate due to the low elevation of satellites in the constellation in use.
Positioning errors should be corrected with the aid of the “Position Offset”. This functionality is not
available unless the CHART button is enabled.
l
l
Accuracy of selecting position of the \GPS\Conning station\Scanner antenna (in the System Configuration
utility). With the incorrectly selected relative coordinates of the scanner antenna and reference point
position (Conning station), an error is entered in the correlation of chart and radar information. To avoid
input of this position, position of the scanner and GPS receiver antenna units should be set with the
maximum possible accuracy:
Error in aligning the scanner centreline plane with the centreline plane of the ship. In the case of inaccurate
aligning of the scanner and ship centreline planes, there is azimuthal deviation between the chart and radar
information. This error is compensated for by entering the offset in the azimuth via the BRG Offset function:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
244
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
l
Gyro error. In the case of a gyro error, there is azimuthally deviation between the chart and radar
information. This error is eliminated by entering an additional correction in the azimuth via the BRG Offset
function:
Delay in the scanner receiver. In the case of delays in the scanner receiver, there is distance discrepancy
between the chart and radar information. This error is compensated for by entering the delay offset via
the DIST Offset function:
If there is any disagreement between the chart and radar information, before the input of additional
offsets, make check measurements on the paper chart (WGS-84). These adjustments should be made
when alongside the berth.
l
l
Scanner antenna installation height. In the immediate vicinity of the ship, the alignment accuracy is
affected by the antenna installation height, as the radar measures an inclined range, whereas a horizontal
range is plotted on the chart. To compensate for this error, it is necessary to enter the antenna
installation height parameter:
Disagreement between the chart scale and selected range. The chart scale determines accuracy of the
objects plotted on it. Accordingly, when small-scale charts are used on small scales, there may be
disagreement between the chart and radar information both in bearing and in range. To eliminate this
error, it is necessary to use, as practicable, the charts in accordance with their original scale. The table
below shows correlation between the selected range and the optimum chart scale.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of Chart Information on RADAR Task
Range
Monitor size/PPI diameter
19"/270 mm
23"/340 mm
0.25
1:3526
1:2832
0.5
1:7134
0.75
Range
245
Monitor size/PPI diameter
19"/270 mm
23"/340 mm
6
1:85604
1:67980
1:5664
12
1:171482
1:136176
1:14268
1:8486
24
1:341592
1:271264
1.5
1:28536
1:16994
48
1:681810
1:541438
3
1:42802
1:33990
For compensations for Navigational Data, see Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors, paragraph
Compensations for Navigational Data.
Chart Layers Control
Only vector charts can be displayed on PPI. For the chart not to interfere with the radar picture display, only
part of the chart information can be shown. To this end, charts are divided into displays.
The RADAR task implements a capability to select the display of various chart information categories:
l
Base Display – display includes classes of information whose display must not be turned off in any
circumstances whatsoever;
l
Std. Display – display includes classes of information essential for the navigation.
The set of Standard Display chart objects is fully compliant with the “Primary Chart Information Set” defined
in IEC 60936-3 standard.
For chart objects included in each display see Chapter 1, section Chart Control, paragraph Layers Control.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
246
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Chart Object Display
The MFD can be displayed in one of the following palettes:
l
Daylight;
l
Dusk;
l
Night;
l
Night inverted.
Palettes correspond to the IHO Presentation Library v. 3.3 in the following way: Daylight– Day; Dusk – Dusk;
Night, Night inverted – Night.
Conditions of Displaying Electronic Charts
Electronic charts are not displayed unless the correct own ship coordinate values (PSN), datum information
(DTM sentence) and heading from the gyro (HDG) are available and if DR or ER mode is selected in the ECDIS
task. If this done, in a minute electronic charts stop to be displayed on the PPI, and CHART button is locked.
For the own ship positioning, the same common CCRP as for the other data (AIS, ARPA, ERBL etc.) is used.
The GPS antenna coordinates are re-calculated to the CCRP coordinates in accordance with a description (see
Chapter 2, section Information Sensors, paragraph Consistent Common Reference System).
The chart display mode is not available in the following cases:
l
CHART button OFF;
l
Position data not available or invalid;
l
Gyro data not available or invalid;
l
Coordinates system (WGS-84) data not available or invalid;
l
Charts not installed;
l
Cartography option not licensed.
Note: With the ROT larger than the antenna rate of revolutions, the radar picture may not agree with the chart
due to the more frequent position and Gyro data updating and, therefore, more frequent chart re-drawing.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 8. Radar Task • Display of Chart Information on RADAR Task
247
If there is an area not covered by the ENC format charts, it is displayed in the following way:
With the electronic chart displayed on the PPI, disagreement between the chart and radar picture caused by
the ship turn, is eliminated within one radar antenna revolution.
In MFD, the radar picture is displayed on top of the electronic chart. You can display the contour of electronic
chart on top of the radar picture as long as
button is pressed on the Display Panel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 9.
Radar Overlay and Targets in
the ECDIS Task
This chapter provides a description of the ECDIS task capabilities in handling the radar
picture and targets.
Radar Overlay
ARPA
Display and Naming of ARPA Targets
Dangerous ARPA Targets
Vectors of ARPA Targets
Guard Zones
Lost Targets
AIS
AIS Transponder Interface
Display of AIS Targets
Naming of AIS Targets
AIS Target Symbol Types, Orientation
Activated and Non-Activated AIS Targets
Dangerous AIS Targets
AIS Target in Guard Zone
Lost AIS Targets
Associating AIS and ARPA Targets
DR Mode of AIS Targets
Obtaining Information on AIS Targets
Target Table
250
251
253
253
254
254
254
255
255
256
258
258
260
261
261
262
263
264
264
265
250
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Radar Overlay
If there are two scanners connected to MFD network configuration, you can select the display of a radar
picture from any of them:
There are some limitations in the selection of a radar picture source. E.g., if the station with the ECDIS task is
connected to the some of the scanners, with the scanner running, the ECDIS task screen can only display the
radar picture from this scanner. If the scanner is set to the STANDBY mode, it becomes possible to display a
radar picture from another scanner.
Some of the radar functions are controlled by the operator on the Control Panel Radar Settings display:
The following parameters can be changed:
l
l
Radius of an area within which the radar picture is formed (Range). The area radius is selected. This radius
can be arbitrarily set by the operator. The following range scales can be set: 0.25 mile, 0.5 mile, 0.75 mile,
1.5 mile, 3 miles, 6 miles, 12 miles, 24 miles, 48 miles. The setting does not depend on the range selection
on the scanner;
Fixed range rings (Rings) are set with regard to the radius of the radar picture formation area (Range) with
the following values:
Range area Discretion of the range rings display (NM)
values (NM)
0–2
0.5
2–6
1
6–12
2
12–24
4
24–48
8
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • ARPA
251
The following radar picture parameters are set on Radar Settings display:
l
l
l
l
Radar picture transparency (Transparency). This is set to enable the display of electronic chart features
under the radar picture layer. The transparency levels from “0” – opaque, to “3” – almost transparent, are
provided. As the “Standard display” is selected on the keyboard ES6, transparency is automatically set
to position “2”:
Parameters of an area on the screen within which the radar picture will be displayed (Overlay window). The
operator sets a rectangular area which will delineate the radar picture:
Radar picture display colour (Echo color). One of the three colours can be set: green, yellow or red:
Radar picture scan-to-scan correlation and smoothing out mode (Accumulation). This is set for its clearer
and more contrast display on the screen. It is not advisable to use this function in case of a considerable
ship yaw and on the routes connected with active manoeuvring:
ARPA
The ECDIS task allows the display of an ARPA target from two external ARPA’s which information on is
provided in the TTM sentences, and the acquisition and processing of a radar target from the radar picture.
The ARPA targets received from ARPA-A/ARPA-B are displayed in the ECDIS task only with different identifiers
containing the source index and number. Targets received and tracked by the ARPA are identified as follows:
l
“A” index – targets received from the ARPA connected on ARPA-A channel;
l
“B” index – targets received from the ARPA connected on ARPA-B channel.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
252
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The ARPA targets are handled on the Acquisition page of the Control Panel Targets display:
The following functions are used for handling ARPA targets on the given WS:
l
Acquire – to call the cursor for the target acquisition; after the target acquisition, it’s motion parameters
are shown on the Chart panel and in the target table;
l
Cancel – to call the cursor for canceling the target acquisition; after the target acquisition canceling, it’s
motion parameters are not shown any more;
l
Cancel All – to cancel the acquisition of all targets on the ECDIS task screen:
l
Guard Zone 1, Guard Zone 2 – to set the guard zone manually; as the target enters such zone, this target is
automatically shown on the screen, and its parameters in a table (after its exit from the zone, the display
remains):
l
Enable "Lost tgt" warning– to set the range and turn on the filter for the Lost target warning generation:
With the filter turned on, the warning is only generated for lost ARPA and active AIS targets within the
circle of a set radius.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • ARPA
253
Display and Naming of ARPA Targets
Symbols of ARPA targets are displayed on the ECDIS task screen in accordance with the following rules:
l
Acquired targets are shown in the form of a dashed line circle centered at the position of target
acquisition
l
;
Steadily tracked targets are shown as green coloured thick solid line circles 3 mm in diameter (with the
radar picture display ON, ARPA targets are shown in green) .
An acquired target is automatically given an ID number. The numbering starts with 1. Every new target is
given the next number (the maximum is 80). If a target is lost, some unoccupied numbers appear, which are
then not assigned to new targets until the maximum number is reached.
If the number of targets exceeds 95% of the maximum number of targets,the 95% ARPA capacity caution is
generated (for alerts description see Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Target
Alerts).
With the number of targets decreasing to less than 85%, this caution is disappears (s).
If the number of targets exceeds the maximum number of targets, the 100 % ARPA capacity warning is
generated.
Handling of targets acquired on the ARPA includes the display of all the tracked targets on the ECDIS task
screen and the display of their parameters in the Target table page of the Targets panel.
ARPA targets acquired and processed in the ECDIS task have a number only, without any index.
The ARPA targets received from ARPA-A are displayed in the ECDIS task with different identifiers containing
the source index and number. Targets received from the ARPA connected on ARPA-A channel are identified
with “A” index and targets received from ARPA-B are identified with “B”.
Attention! The ARPA targets received from ARPA-A and ARPA-B are only displayed in the ECDIS task, and
they are not covered by alarms and warnings generated for targets acquired and processed in the ECDIS task. The
exception is provided by the Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm which is generated for ARPA targets received from
ARPA-A/B.
Dangerous ARPA Targets
Considered dangerous are CPA/TCPA values, which are simultaneously equal to or smaller than safe
CPA/TCPA value set by the user on Targets panel. As a dangerous target appears, Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm
is triggered off.
The symbol of a dangerous target is a red coloured 5 mm diameter circles
.
The symbol of the dangerous target is flashing until Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm is acknowledged.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
254
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Vectors of ARPA Targets
Vectors indicates the projected direction and speed of a tracked target. The end of the target vector
represents where that target will be in “n” minutes (where “n” represents the vector time set in the Vectors
combo box in the Operational Panel window of the Control panel) if the target holds current speed and
course.
Vectors of ARPA targets are displayed automatically for all the acquired targets
not shown unless a certain vector length is set.
. The minute notch is
Vectors are shown in green colour. Vectors of dangerous targets are shown in the red colour.
Guard Zones
Two guard zones can be defined. Parameters of the Guard Zones are counted from the scanner. The user can
set the dimensions of these zones. The following limitations are imposed in this case:
l
The distance to the inner boundary of the Guard Zone shall not be less than 0.1 miles;
l
The dimensions of the Guard Zone shall not be less than 5º by angle and less than 0.5 miles by width.
As a target enters a guard zone, the Wxx GZ Tgt ID warning is generated. Before the alarm acknowledgement,
ARPA targets are shown as follows:
l
l
l
Radar targets in acquisition state acquired automatically in the Guard zone, are shown as a
flashing red 5 mm diameter dashed line circle.
The steadily tracked targets acquired automatically in the Guard zone, are shown as a flashing
red 3 mm diameter thick solid line circle.
The steadily tracked targets in the Guard Zone, are shown as a flashing 3 mm diameter thick
solid line circle.
The symbol is flashing until Wxx GZ Tgt ID warning is acknowledged.
Boundaries of the ring shaped zones are set by using the cursor. There may be the following setting options:
l
Change of the ring width;
l
Circular motion of the zone relative to the own ship mark (without changes in the dimensions or shape);
l
Change of the coverage angle;
l
Moving the zone closer to or farther from the own ship mark (with a change of the zone width).
Lost Targets
The tracking is cancelled, and the target is considered to be lost according to the following algorithm:
l
Up to 1 minute after the acquisition – target missed 6 times;
l
From 1 to 3 minutes after the acquisition – target missed 11 times;
l
3 and more minutes after the acquisition – target missed 18 times.
A lost target is shown as a red coloured crossed lines centred on the target symbol
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
.
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • AIS
255
With the Enable "Lost tgt" warning checkbox is unchecked, ARPA targets stop to be displayed on the
ECDIS task screen immediately after the timeout expiry.
With the Enable "Lost tgt" warning checkbox is checked, ARPA targets which are not within the circle of a
radius specified in the filter settings, stop to be displayed on the ECDIS task screen immediately after the
timeout expiry. Applicable to the ARPA targets within the circle, after 30 seconds the timeout expiry, or after
the warning acknowledgement, the display of the ARPA lost target is stopped.
AIS
AIS Transponder Interface
AIS (Automatic Identification System) is used for the automatic data exchange
with ships and various coastal objects fitted out with this system, via VHF channel.
Interfacing of this device with the MFD produces the following capabilities:
l
l
l
l
To receive and display data on other targets using the AIS (coordinates, name, MMSI, IMO number,
ship’s navigation status, ship’s type and nature of cargo, speed, etc.);
To receive and display additional data transmitted by ships and coastal AIS;
To transmit own ship data (coordinates, name, MMSI and IMO number,
type of cargo, type and navigation status of the ship, course, speed, etc.);
To transmit messages with different status to other AIS system objects.
Information on the own ship transmitted to other ships of AIS system, is displayed on Voyage and Static Data
page:
In Static Data group, ship data are provided for reference and cannot be changed.
Messages are compiled and sent on Messaging page of AIS panel.
Note: If the AIS class B is selected during the installation the set of possible settings is limited.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
256
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Display of AIS Targets
The MFD processes and displays “Vessels class A&B” type AIS targets only (VDM 1, 2, 3, 5, 18, 19, 24
sentences); information on these targets is received by the AIS transponder without any limitations. These
targets transmit information with the intervals specified in the following tables.
Class A Shipborne Mobile Equipment Reporting Intervals:
Type of Ship
Reporting interval
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots
3 min
Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots
10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 0–14 knots
10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 0–14 knots and changing course
3 1/3 sec
Ship with a speed of between 14–23 knots
6 sec
Ship with a speed of between 14–23 knots and changing course
2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots
2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots and changing course
2 sec
Reporting Intervals For Equipment Other Than Class A Shipborne Mobile Equipment:
Platform's Condition
Nominal reporting interval
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment not moving faster than 2 knots
3 min
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 2–14 knots
30 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 14–23 knots
15 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving > 23 knots
5 sec
Search and Rescue aircraft (airborne mobile equipment)
10 sec
Aids to Navigation
3 min
AIS base station
10 sec
These targets are not displayed unless the own ship coordinates are available (Lat/Lon), as AIS target position
is referenced to the absolute geographic coordinates.
Attention! Up to 1024 AIS targets can be processed simultaneously. AIS targets are processed in turn, so
there may be a loss of a target due to the excessive traffic.
If the number of targets exceeds 95% of the maximum number of targets,the 95% AIS capacity caution is
generated (for alerts description see Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Target
Alerts).
With the number of targets decreasing to less than 85%, this caution is disappears (s).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • AIS
257
If the number of targets exceeds the maximum number of targets, the 100% AIS capacity warning is generated.
After this warning has been triggered off, the operator can decrease the AIS targets processing radius (see
document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). ECDIS User Manual, Chapter 10, section AIS, paragraph Handling
AIS Targets, item AIS Target Display) thus reducing the number of the processed AIS targets.
Different filters are used for reducing the number of displayed targets.
The filter is controlled from the AIS page of the Targets panel.
By default, the filter for sleeping AIS targets is OFF. It is possible to select criteria for filtering sleeping
AIS targets which will not be displayed on the PPI:
l
RNG – to filter targets beyond the user set limits;
l
CPA – to filter targets whose CPA is larger than the value set by the user;
l
TCPA – to filter targets whose TCPA is larger than the value set by the user.
You can also use the Display by type group to turn off presentation of the EDIS task screen (which is turned on
by default) for the following AIS target types:
l
Class A;
l
Class B;
l
AtoN;
l
AIS LR;
l
Base station;
l
SAR aircraft;
l
SART;
l
Virtual AtoN.
If the sleeping AIS targets filtering is enabled, or the display of some AIS targets type it turned off, the AIS filter
important indication is displayed in the Vectors window of the Control Panel (see also document MultiFunctional Display (v. 3.00.340). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section Indications, paragraph Display of
Important Indications).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
258
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Warning! It should be noted that dangerous AIS targets can also be filtered off for display with the aid of the
AIS filter. Nevertheless the Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm will be generated for AIS targets.
Targets received from the AIS are displayed in the ECDIS task with identifiers which can be selected by the
operator on the Targets Table page of Targets panel.
The following from identifiers are available:
l
By ID;
l
By MMSI number;
l
By Call Sign;
l
By Name.
Naming of AIS Targets
Targets are named in accordance with the same rules as ARPA targets. The name of an AIS target is formed
from ‘T’ prefix (from transponder) and its unique identifier, i.e., T1, T2, T10, etc.
AIS Target Symbol Types, Orientation
AIS targets are displayed on the ECDIS task screen according to the following rules:
l
l
l
Sleeping AIS targets are presented as acute isosceles triangles oriented to the targets’ reported
heading (or COG if heading is not reported) and centred at the targets’ reported position. The
base of the triangles is 3 mm and the height is 4,5 mm. The triangles are drawn using a thick solid
green line.
A sleeping AIS targets with neither a reported heading nor COG are shown as a dashed-line green
coloured triangle oriented toward the top of the operational display area.
Activated AIS targets are presented as acute isosceles triangles oriented to the targets’ reported
heading (or COG if heading is not reported) and centred at the targets’ reported position. The
base of the triangles is 4 mm and the height is 6 mm. The triangles are drawn using a thick solid
green line.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
259
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • AIS
l
l
l
l
l
If information on AIS target dimensions is available, and the current scale permitting (the
appropriate range scale is selected), AIS targets are shown in the form of a ship contour. Ship
contour is drawn around the AIS target symbol triangles relative to the targets’ reported position
according to the offsets, beam and length. The contour is drawn using a thick solid green line.
If there is no information on the target’s COG/SOG vector or the own ship’s COG/SOG vector
affecting the CPA/TCPA calculations, the AIS targets are shown as a dashed-line green coloured
triangle (contour) oriented toward the top of the operational display area.
AIS aids to navigation (ATON) are presented as a green diamond with crossed lines centred at the
reported position of the ATON.
A virtual AIS ATON has the green letter ‘V’ superimposed on the symbol so that it does not extend
beyond the diamond and does not intersect with the crossed lines.
An AIS search and rescue transmitter (AISSART) is drawn as a green circle with cross.
AIS aids to navigation symbols:
AIS AtoN
l
Basic shape;
l
Racon;
l
Emergency wreck mark;
l
North cardinal mark;
l
East cardinal mark
l
South cardinal mark
l
West cardinal mark
l
Port hand mark
Physical
Virtual
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
260
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
AIS AtoN
l
Starboard hand mark
l
Isolated danger
l
Safe water
l
Special mark
l
l
Physical
Virtual
Off position (AIS AtoN is indicates off position of floating aid with yellow text “Off
Posn”)
The absence of a charted physical AtoN is communicated as a combined state of
‘virtual’ and ‘off position’. This is indicated with yellow text “Missing” above the
dotted outline diamond using colour yellow.
Target symbols are oriented along the ship’s valid gyro heading (HDG), and where the HDG is not available,
along the ship’s valid course over the ground (COG).
Activated and Non-Activated AIS Targets
All the AIS targets displayed on the ECDIS task screen (including dangerous targets) are considered non-active
(sleeping) from the moment they are first displayed on the screen.
Sleeping targets are displayed in the form of an appropriate symbol without vectors.
The user can activate any displayed AIS target. The target is considered to be activated until:
l
l
It is deactivated manually by the user;
It is lost (in this case, if new data on the lost target arrived before its deleting, the target is considered to
be active again).
Active AIS targets are displayed as an appropriate symbol and vectors. Vectors are not displayed unless there
is relevant valid data.
Heading lines are originate at the apex of the AIS triangle. Turn indicators are presented as a single line
perpendicular to the heading line in
the direction of turn.
The COG/SOG vector is shown with a dashed line whose length depends on the selected vector length value
(in minutes).
When an AIS target is shown as a ship contour, vectors originate from its AIS antenna fixing point
(ABCD parameters).
The previously activated target can be switched to sleeping/non-active status.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • AIS
261
The filter on the Acquisition page of the Targets panel is used for the automatic activation of targets.
By default, the filter for activation of sleeping AIS targets is OFF. It is possible to select criteria for sleeping
AIS targets activation:
l
RNG – to activate AIS targets beyond the user set limits;
l
CPA – to activate AIS targets whose CPA is larger than the value set by the user;
l
TCPA – to activate AIS targets whose TCPA is larger than the value set by the user.
Dangerous AIS Targets
Considered dangerous are targets whose CPA/TCPA values are both equal to or smaller than CPA/TCPA safe
values set by the user on Alarmgroup of the Target Table page of the Targets panel.
As soon as the CPA/TCPA values become smaller than the settings, CPA/TCPA AIS Target ID alarm is triggered
off.
Each new dangerous target causes the alarm to be triggered off anew.
The symbol (contour) of a dangerous target is always shown as red coloured larger triangle, with a
base of 5 mm and a height of 7,5 mm. COG/SOG vector is shown in the red colour. HDG vector is
displayed according to the general rules for the display of an HDG vector for activated targets and is
shown in the red colour.
The dangerous target is automatically activated, and the symbol of this target is flashing until Wxx CPA/TCPA
Tgt ID alarm is acknowledged.
AIS Target in Guard Zone
As an AIS targets gets into the GZ, Wxx GZ Tgt ID warning is generated.
The AIS targets is automatically activated and starts flickering. After the warning acknowledgement, the
flickering stops. Each new target causes to the warning to be generated anew.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
262
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Lost AIS Targets
If no data on the AIS target has been received from MFD within a certain time interval which depends on the
target category, such target is considered to be lost. The timeout for various target categories is shown in the
table below.
Category of Ship
Alarm after timeout
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots
380 sec
(class B not moving faster than 2 knots)
Ship at anchor or moored and moving at more than 3 knots
41 sec
Ship 0–14 knots (class B 2–14 knots)
41 sec
Ship 0–14 knots and changing course
41 sec
Ship 14–23 knots
41 sec
Ship 14–23 knots and changing course
40 sec
Ship > 23 knots
30 sec
Ship > 23 knots and changing course
30 sec
Class B not moving faster than 2 knots
380 sec
Class B 2–14 knots
300 sec
Ship 14–23 knots
150 sec
Ship > 23 knots
50 sec
Lost targets are shown on the ECDIS task screen in the last accepted coordinates.
The sleeping lost AIS targets stop to be displayed on the ECDIS task screen without any warning after the
timeout expires.
Effective for the active AIS targets are filter settings on the Acquisition page of the Targets display.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • AIS
263
With the Enable "Lost tgt ID" warning checkbox is unchecked, AIS targets stop to be displayed on the
ECDIS task screen immediately after the timeout expiry.
With the Enable "Lost tgt ID" warning checkbox is checked, AIS targets which are not within the circle of a
radius specified in the filter settings, stop to be displayed on the ECDIS task screen immediately after the
timeout expiry. Applicable to the active AIS targets within the circle, after 30 seconds the timeout expiry the
display of the AIS lost target is stopped. Wxx Lost Tgt ID warning is triggered off.
A lost target is shown as red crossed lines centered on the AIS target symbol
Lost AIS targets and the warning disappear automatically from the ECDIS task screen 30 sec later or after the
warning acknowledgement.
Associating AIS and ARPA Targets
The AIS and ARPA targets are associated if both targets meet certain criteria, and it is highly probable that this
is one and the same target. The association criteria vary with the target speed:
l
for low-speed targets (below 5 knots) – target position;
l
for high-speed targets (5 knots and higher) – position and COG.
The by-position association is not possible unless the target is tracked steadily for at least 60 seconds, and for
at least 180 seconds in the case of the by- COG association.
The by-position association is made by comparing the ARPA and AIS target position in both, range and
bearing. If the disagreement does not exceed a certain threshold value, targets are associated. The threshold
range value depends on the set radar scale, whereas the threshold azimuth value – on the target range.
The by-course association is made by comparing the COG of ARPA and AIS targets.
The targets are disassociated if the disagreement is more than twice the threshold value.
The targets association mode is controlled from the AIS page of the Targets display. The association mode is
enabled simultaneously with the selection of a priority for displaying AIS or ARPA targets after the association
from the Association drop-down list.
If ARPA target is lost, the association is disabled, and the ECDIS task screen shows the AIS target only.
If the AIS functionality is disabled, or the AIS button is turned off, the association is disabled, and the ECDIS
task screen shows the ARPA target only.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
264
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
DR Mode of AIS Targets
To switch on DR mode for AIS targets, use DR for AIS targets button on AIS page
of Targets display after the input of the minimum speed from which DR calculations are started.
In this case, the following specific features of dead reckoning for AIS targets should be taken into account:
l
l
l
Dead reckoning of targets is made from the latest data on the true course and speed (COG/SOG). As the
rate of data transmission from the targets is dependent on their speed, manoeuvring and navigation
status, time before the data arrival may be as much as 10 sec;
As the target data is updated by the transponder and the MFD, it is displayed on the screen in accordance
with the last received coordinates;
There can be no dead reckoning of AIS targets with “At anchor” and “Moored” status.
Obtaining Information on AIS Targets
Parameters of AIS targets are displayed in the Target Table page of Targets panel.
To promptly obtain more detailed information on a certain target, use a free cursor. With its help, a data card
with AIS target data is displayed:
CPA and TCPA of dangerous targets are displayed in the data card in red colour.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 9. Radar Overlay and Targets in the ECDIS Task • Target Table
265
Target Table
The ARPA, AIS and Seetrac targets tracked and displayed on the ECDIS task screen, are entered in the table
on Target Table page of theTargets panel, where they can be sorted by Name, CPA, TCPA, Alias and Range.
Each target is assigned a certain status according to its speed and calculated CPA and TCPA parameters. A
dangerous target vectors (both CPA and TCPA values are smaller than the operator settings) is highlighted in
red colour. With the alert enabled for each tracked dangerous target, Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm message
is generated.
To make a fast search for targets on the ECDIS task screen, press the button with the target’s name. As this is
done, the ECDIS task screen is re-drawn so that the necessary target is displayed in its centre. For 10 seconds
the target is highlighted with a flashing circle.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 10.
Network Configuration
This chapter provides a description of special MFD operation features in the network
configuration.
Network Configuration
General
Interswitch
Navigational Data Management
Data Synchronization
ECDIS Master and Slave
Integrated Task Control and Monitoring
268
268
269
270
271
271
272
268
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Network Configuration
General
Networking of several WS’s produces additional MFD use capabilities:
l
Interswitch;
l
Navigation Data Management;
l
Data Synchronization.
The standard configuration is shown in the figure below:
Connected to the system simultaneously can be up to 4 scanners. Not more than 2 scanners are connected
to one WS. The example of such configuration is shown in the figure below:
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 10. Network Configuration • Network Configuration
269
Interswitch
The MFD on different WS’s within the network configuration has different scanner control rights. For each
band (X-band and S-band), there is always one station only which controls the scanner in this band. This
station has the Radar MASTER status. Other stations have no scanner control capabilities. These stations
have the Radar SLAVE status.
The table below shows the WS capability to operate in different modes.
Function
Master station
Slave station
Range selection
Full control
±1 range from Master (except
0.25, 0.5, 0.75 ranges)1
Pulse selection (LP, MP, SP)
Full control
Indication
Scanner management
Full control
Indication
Scanner adjustments (Radar settings button
Full control
Unavailable
Blank Sectors
Full control
Unavailable
PM
Full control
Unavailable
RIB6 adjustment (amplification, offset,
Full control
Unavailable
Bearing\Distance offset
Full control
Unavailable
Interference rejection (IR)
Full control
Indication
Gain\Rain\Sea
Full control (saving for each
Full control (saving for each
scanner independently)
scanner independently)
of Radar-Scanner panel)
polarities)
When the system is started for the first time, the WS status (Radar MASTER or SLAVE) depends on the initial
configuration made in the System Configuration utility during the installation.
In the course of the system operation, the user can change distribution of the radar control rights between
the stations. To do this, it is necessary to pass the rights (Hand Over Control) from the Radar MASTER WS to
the Radar SLAVE WS of the scanner in question. In this case, the reception of rights (Take Over Control)
should be confirmed in the confirmation window which is shown automatically on the Radar SLAVE WS.
While the Radar MASTER/SLAVE rights are being passed, the scanner switches to the StandBy state. All the
scanner and radar processor (RIB6) settings are passed to the new Radar MASTER and are displayed in the
RADAR task on this WS.
1– after switching of the scale on Master Station scale on Slave station will be synchronized automatically if
the difference does not exceed ±1 step. Otherwise, slave station scale will be the same as Master station. Use
can change this scale to ±1 step from original one. These scales will be marked by color (red).
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
270
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The user can pass the Radar MASTER rights to the WS which is currently not a SLAVE for this scanner. To do
this, you should:
l
l
switch the WS to the Radar SLAVE status for the selected scanner;
open the Interswitch page of the Status management panel and perform a standard procedure for
handing/taking over the rights.
The system automatically restores the workstation rights after the restart/turning off, i.e., the station which
had the Radar MASTER rights before the restart/turning off, becomes the Radar MASTER. If the Radar
MASTER station is turned off, the request to accept the radar control rights is sent automatically to all the
Radar SLAVE WS’s of the scanner in question. The user can select one of the WS’s for a new Radar MASTER.
The WS can be appointed Radar MASTER for two scanners simultaneously. The relevant status is indicated in
the RADAR task of the given WS. In this case, however, the radar overlay can be obtained from the active
scanner only (TX mode), the second radar is in the StandBy mode.
In the case of faults in the network equipment, the Interswitch functionality changes. For a detailed
description, see Annex B.
Navigational Data Management
The control of navigation data by different tasks on the one WS has different privileges. There is always one
task only, which has a full control of the navigation data. This task has the Navigation MASTER status.
This functionality also is possible in the network configuration, in this case the system can make a centralised
use of data connected either to one or to another station. Control of navigation data from other task is limited.
These tasks have Navigation SLAVE status. This being the case, sensors in use can be assigned with Navigation
MASTER status task only, the task with the Navigation SLAVE status only shows which sensors are used.
Attention! In case of the network break, each station will be operating independently providing a full set of
features as a standalone system.
The navigational data which can be used on each WS, in this case is the data from sensors physically
connected to this station. The capability to assign sensors to the tasks with the Navigation SLAVE status on
this WS will be automatically unlocked, both stations will have the one task with Navigation MASTER status.
As the network connection is restored, assigned with the Navigation MASTER status will be the task which
had this status at the moment of the break (when the stations are restarted, the highest priority task will be
appointed task with Navigation MASTER status (see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340).
Installation Guide Part I , Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings).
Functions available from the station with Navigation MASTER status only:
l
Selection of navigation data sources (Position, COG/SOG, HDG, STW);
l
Setting reference points;
l
Setting position offset, gyro error;
l
Setting navigation alarm parameters, and turning these alarms on:
o
Antigrounding alarm and parameter;
o
Safety Depth.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 10. Network Configuration • Network Configuration
271
Data Synchronization
Within the network configuration, collections required for operation of different WS are equalised by
software facilities. I.e., the following collections will be identical on all the WS’s:
l
Electronic Navigational Charts;
l
Maps (Radar MAPS) and Manual correction;
l
Routes;
l
Navtex database;
l
Alert management.
The chart collection is installed with the aid of the Navi-Planner 4000 application on one WS and is then
synchronised on another WS by using the functions of this sofware. In case of the network break, each
station operates in the Standalone mode, so all the chart handling operations (installation of licenses, charts,
their update, etc.) has to be performed on each WS individually.
The collection of maps is synchronised automatically as they are handled on all the WS’s (installed, edited
and deleted). In case of the network break, operations on the maps should be performed on each WS
separately.
Routes are supplied to the MFD from external devices, e.g., GPS or ECDIS which are connected to one WS
and then synchronised on all the WS’s throughout the network. When the network is broken, it is only the
WS which is directly connected to the external route source device which retains the capability to receive
routes.
ECDIS Master and Slave
If the ECDIS task is assigned as Navigation MASTER, there are following functions available:
l
Selection of essential data sources (Position, HDG, STW, COG/SOG, Depth);
l
Setting position offset, gyro error, magnetic variation, ships’ draught;
l
Setting time zone and its change time;
l
Setting navigation alarm parameters, and turning these alarms on:
o
Navigation danger (alarm and parameter);
o
Safety Contour (alarm and parameter);
o
Sounder Depth (alarm and parameter);
o
Anchor Watch (alarm and parameter);
o
Safety Contour (value in metres);
o
Safety Depth;
o
Approach to Area (value in minutes);
o
Shallow Contour (parameter);
o
Deep Contour (parameter);
o
Area warnings.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
272
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
l
Loading monitored route and schedule;
l
Setting the following route components for monitoring:
l
o
Next WPT;
o
Arrival circle;
o
Radius.
Setting parameters for alarms connected with motion along the route according to a schedule, and
turning these alarms on:
o
Off Chart;
o
End of Route;
o
Out of Schedule (in minutes);
o
WPT Approach (in minutes);
o
Off leg course (in degrees);
o
Out of XTD.
l
Setting of time zone and its change time;
l
Setting time-related alarms:
l
o
End of Watch;
o
Timer off.
Sending AIS messages (AIS Control).
Integrated Task Control and Monitoring
Within ECDIS task, there is general control of operation modes for different WS the entire network
configuration, i.e., a change of parameter on one WS causes synchronous change of this parameter on other
WS’s.
Name
ECDIS
ES6
Keyboard
Name
ECDIS
ES6
Keyboard
Monitored route
Yes
N/A
Radius
Yes
N/A
Monitored schedule
Yes
N/A
BWOL
Yes
N/a
Time
Yes
N/A
XTD, display of Port Side/ Starboard
Yes
N/A
Side settings for the current leg of
the route loaded in the ECS-Master
for monitoring
Time zone
Yes
N/A
DWOL
Yes
N/A
Safety Contour (alarm and
Yes
N/A
ETA
Yes
N/A
parameter)
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Chapter 10. Network Configuration • Integrated Task Control and Monitoring
273
Name
ECDIS
ES6
Keyboard
Name
ECDIS
ES6
Keyboard
Navigation danger (alerts and
Yes
N/A
TTG to the current point
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
CRS to the current point
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
AIS message
Yes
N/A
Safety Contour (value in metres)
Yes
N/A
End of Watch
Yes
N/A
Safety Depth
Yes
N/A
Timer off
Yes
N/A
Approach to Area (value in
Yes
N/A
Off Chart
Yes
N/A
Area alerts
Yes
N/A
End of Route
Yes
N/A
Shallow Contour (parameter)
Yes
N/A
Out of Schedule (in minutes)
Yes
N/A
Deep Contour (parameter)
Yes
N/A
WPT Approach (in minutes)
Yes
N/A
Position Offset
Yes
N/A
Off leg course (in degrees)
Yes
N/A
Gyro error
Yes
N/A
Off-Track
Yes
N/A
Magnetic variation
Yes
N/A
MOB
Yes
Yes
Draught
Yes
N/A
EVENT
Yes
Yes
Monitored points (Next WPT)
Yes
N/A
parameters)
Sounder Depth (alert and
parameter)
Anchor Watch (alert and
parameter)
minutes)
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Annex A.
Additional Information
276
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Hot Keys
Hot keys
ES6 functional key
Brief description of purpose
<F4>
<Event>
To make an instant position recording in the electronic log
<F8>
<Ahead>
To turn on the Navigation mode
<Shift> + <F7>
<St. Display>
To show chart objects belonging to the Standard Display
<Shift> + <F8>
<Show all Layers>
To turn on the display of all the chart object classes
<Shift> + <F11>
To turn on/off the display of ARPA targets
<Ctrl> + <A>
<Alarm>
To acknowledge an alarm
<Alt> + <F1>
<Night/Day>
To switch successively the screen colour palette to suit the time of
<Alt> + <F2>
the day
<Alt> + <F3>
<Alt> + <F4>
<Alt> + <H>
<N/H/C Up>
To switch successively to North Up/Heading Up/Course Up
motion mode
<Alt> + <Q>
<Overlay On/Off>
To turn on/off the Overlay mode
<Alt> + <Y>
<Rings On/Off>
To turn on/off the display of range rings
<+>
<Zoom In>
To increase the chart display scale in the ECDIS task
<->
<Zoom Out>
To reduce the chart display scale in the ECDIS task
<SHOW RADAR>
To select the radar picture (with the button kept depressed):
<SHOW CHART>
l
to turn on the overlay;
l
transparency value – 0;
l
Chart Base display
To select chart information (with the button kept depressed):
l
transparency value – 3;
l
no targets are displayed;
l
no tides or currents are displayed;
l
no Add Info objects are displayed
<Targets On/Off>
To turn on/off the display of ARPA and AIS targets
<TM/RM>
To switch between the True and Relative motion modes
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Annex A. Additional Information • Hot Keys
Hot keys
ES6 functional key
Brief description of purpose
<EBL>
To adjust the electronic bearing line value
<On/Off>
To turn on the display of electronic bearing lines 1 and 2 (to
277
switch between the electronic bearing lines press the EBL knob)
<VRM>
To adjust the variable range marker value
<On/Off>
To turn on the display of variable range markers 1 and 2 (to switch
between the variable range markers, press the VRM knob)
<Ctrl> + <P>
To create a graphic screen copy with a offer to send the graphic
screen copy to the printer installed by default
<Alt> + <L>
To turn on/off the display of light (lighthouse) sectors on the TX-97
format charts
For the Hot Keys setup, see document Multi-Functional Display (v. 3.00.340). Utilities, Chapter 11.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Annex B.
System’s Single Point Failure
Tolerance
Dual Network System Configuration
Single Network System Configuration
System Diagnostics
280
284
286
280
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Dual Network System Configuration
The drawing shows the block diagram of the radar system which includes 2 radars and 2 workstations. The
navigational data sources are not shown in the diagram: all the navigational sensors (LOG, GYRO, GPS, AIS,
etc.) are connected to the data collection unit (DCU), which enables transmission of this data onto the
Ethernet HUB. From this viewpoint, the DCU behaviour is similar to the behaviour of the RIB6 radar
processor.
If all the system elements are in good order, the system functions as follows.
Each workstation controls its own radar and displays the respective picture. In this case, both radars function
simultaneously. The operator can use the second station in the slave mode.
System operation options:
Workstation 1
Workstation 2
1
Master Radar 1
Master Radar 2
2
Master Radar 2
Master Radar 1
3
Master Radar 1
Slave Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
4
Slave Radar 1
Master Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
5
Master Radar 2
Slave Radar 2
Radar 1 – StandBy
6
Slave Radar 2
Master Radar 2
Radar 1- StandBy
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Notes
Annex B. System’s Single Point Failure Tolerance • Dual Network System Configuration
281
Let us assume that one of the Ethernet HUB's has failed. The system behaviour does not change in this case:
the data flow between the system components uses the second network which turns from the backup to the
main one. The system also functions in the same way if one of the workstation network adapters fails or the
network cable breaks.
System operation options:
Workstation 1
Workstation 2
Notes
1
Master Radar 1
Master Radar 2
2
Master Radar 2
Master Radar 1
3
Master Radar 1
Slave Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
4
Slave Radar 1
Master Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
5
Master Radar 2
Slave Radar 2
Radar 1 – StandBy
6
Slave Radar 2
Master Radar 2
Radar 1- StandBy
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
282
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
The malfunction of one of the radar processors (the drawing shows failure of the first one) is similar to the
malfunction of one of the radars. The system cannot receive radar picture form this radar.
System operation options (unavailable modes are marked with grey):
Workstation 1
Workstation 2
1
Master Radar 1
Master Radar 2
2
Master Radar 2
Master Radar 1
3
Master Radar 1
Slave Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
4
Slave Radar 1
Master Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
5
Master Radar 2
Slave Radar 2
Radar 1 – N/A
6
Slave Radar 2
Master Radar 2
Radar 1- N/A
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Notes
Annex B. System’s Single Point Failure Tolerance • Dual Network System Configuration
283
The malfunction of one of the workstations (the drawing shows failure of the first one) results in the
impossibility of using two radar simultaneously – only one radar can operate in the transmit mode. The
workstation malfunction is understood as a failure of one of the following components:
l
RS6 processor unit;
l
Monitor;
l
Keyboard.
System operation options (unavailable modes are marked with grey):
Workstation 1
Workstation 2
Notes
1
Master Radar 1
Master Radar 2
Radar 1 – StandBy
2
Master Radar 2
Master Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
284
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
Single Network System Configuration
Configuration of a system with a single network is shown in the drawing.
System operation options:
Workstation 1
Workstation 2
Notes
1
Master Radar 1
Master Radar 2
2
Master Radar 2
Master Radar 1
3
Master Radar 1
Slave Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
4
Slave Radar 1
Master Radar 1
Radar 2 – StandBy
5
Master Radar 2
Slave Radar 2
Radar 1 – StandBy
6
Slave Radar 2
Master Radar 2
Radar 1- StandBy
The system behaviour in the case of the RIB6 radar processor or workstation failure is similar to the
behaviour of the dual network system. In the case of a faulty network switch or the workstation network
controller (radar processor), the radar control becomes impossible.
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Annex B. System’s Single Point Failure Tolerance • Single Network System Configuration
285
To restore the system operation, connect the workstation network controllers direct to the radar processors
(new connections are shown in green). A similar procedure is used in the case of a faulty network controller.
Every workstation and radar processor have two controllers each, the network cable should be switched
from the faulty to the sound device.
System operation options:
1
Workstation 1
Workstation 2
Master Radar 1
Master Radar 2
Notes
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
286
Multi-Functional Display • Functional Description
System Diagnostics
Failure message
Possible cause
Troubleshooting procedure
“Name: Scanner
No power supply to the radar
Use a voltmeter to check power on the radar
Faulty radar controller
Perform the radar diagnostics, replace faulty components
Connecting cable broken
Check cables and connectors. Replace faulty components
Faulty RIB6
Replace the RIB6
Incorrect RIB6 setup
Set up the RIB6 – check video signal polarity and gain
High frequency (Video) cable
Check cables and connectors. Replace faulty components
control” warning
“Name: Video
failure" warning
broken
Faulty RIB6
Use the oscillograph to check if there is video signal at the RIB6
input. Replace the RIB6
“Name: Bearing
Faulty radar
Perform the radar diagnostics, replace faulty components
Incorrect RIB6 setup
Set up the RIB6 – check the set number of pulses per antenna
failure” warning
revolution, check the signal polarity and detection threshold
Cable broken
Check cables and connectors. Replace faulty components
Faulty RIB6
Use the oscillograph to check if there is video signal at the RIB6
input. Replace the RIB6
“Name: Heading
Faulty radar
Perform the radar diagnostics, replace faulty components
Incorrect RIB6 setup
Set up the RIB6 – check the signal polarity and detection
failure” warning
threshold
Cable broken
Check cables and connectors. Replace faulty components
Faulty RIB6
Use the oscillograph to check if there is video signal at the RIB6
input. Replace the RIB6
Faulty radar
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Perform the radar diagnostics, replace faulty components
Annex B. System’s Single Point Failure Tolerance • System Diagnostics
Failure message
Possible cause
Troubleshooting procedure
“Name:Trigger
Incorrect RIB6 setup
Set up the RIB6 – check the signal polarity and detection
failure” warning
287
threshold
High frequency (Video) cable
Check cables and connectors. Replace faulty components
broken
Faulty RIB6
Use the oscillograph to check if there is video signal at the RIB6
input. Replace the RIB6
Faulty radar
Perform the radar diagnostics, replace faulty components
One of the network cables
Check cables and connectors. Replace faulty components
broken
Faulty workstation network
Replace the workstation
controller
“Name:
Faulty network switch
Replace the device
Faulty RIB6
Restart or replace the RIB6
Connection
failure” warning
COPYRIGHT: © TRANSAS MIP LTD 1993–2016 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Annex C.
MFD Failure Mode and Effect
Analyses
290
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
FMEA Table
SW fault includes: 1. Application fault. 2. Application does not respond. 3. Connection to application fault.
HW fault includes: 1. Power failure. 2. Station/Sensor damage. 3. Connection break.
Sensor fault includes: 1. Power failure. 2. Sensor damage. 3. Connection break.
Corrupted message includes: 1. Wrong checksum. 2. Wrong sentence formation.
Invalid data: status obtained by character in the message.
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
ECDIS master
ECDIS SW fault
Functional limitations due to fault
l
station fault
l
Station HW fault
l
l
One of ECDIS display out of
order;
System’s automatic
response
First Backup ECDIS station
switched to Master mode
Radar picture from X-band
Radar will disappear on the
others workstations (if RIB in
use)
One of ECDIS display out of
order;
Radar picture from X-band
Radar will disappear on the
others workstations (if RIB in
use)
Recommended procedure
l
Check ships position course and speed;
l
Restart application;
l
First Backup ECDIS station
switched to Master mode
Call service engineer if station does not
work
l
Check ships position course and speed;
l
Restart application;
l
Call service engineer if station does not
work
291
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
ECDIS backup
ECDIS SW fault
Functional limitations due to fault
l
(planning)
One of ECDIS station out of
order;
System’s automatic
response
No
Recommended procedure
l
l
station fault
l
l
Station HW fault
l
Radar picture from S-band
Radar will disappear on the
others workstations (if RIB in
use);
l
l
ECDIS slave
ECDIS SW fault
l
station fault
One of ECDIS display out of
order;
No
l
Radar picture from S-band
Radar will disappear on the
others workstations (if RIB in
use);
l
Restart application;
Call service engineer if station does not
work
SPOS Weather Module out of
order (optionally);
Digitizer is inaccessible
One of ECDIS station out of
order
No
l
l
Station HW fault
Call service engineer if station does not
work
Digitizer is inaccessible
l
l
Restart application;
One of ECDIS display out of
order
No
l
l
Restart application;
Call service engineer if station does not
work
Restart application;
Call service engineer if station does not
work
292
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
DGPS
Sensor fault
Limitation during fallback to valid PS
Fallback to the next valid
system:
positioning sensor in 10 sec
(GPS/GLONASS)
(Primary)
l
l
l
l
l
DGPS mode lost
Ship symbol related to
positioning system
is unreliable on the Chart
panel;
Recommended procedure
l
Use alternative source (PS2) as the Primary
positioning system to restore the function;
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer.
If alternative EPFS sensor is not available, change
positioning source to DR or ER mode
Coordinate values are
unreliable;
COG – SOG values are
unreliable;
Drift calculations are
unreliable;
RIB/ARPA Target data are
inaccessible
Position accuracy is reduced to GPS
Primary/Secondary diverge
SPS values
value changed
No
293
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
Corrupted message
Limitation during fallback to valid PS
Fallback to the next valid
system:
positioning sensor in 10 sec
l
l
l
l
l
Ship symbol related to
positioning system is
unreliable on the Chart panel;
Coordinate values are
unreliable;
COG – SOG values are
unreliable;
Drift calculations are
unreliable;
RIB/ARPA Target data are
inaccessible
Recommended procedure
l
Use alternative source (PS2) as Primary
positioning system to restore the function;
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer.
If alternative EPFS sensor is not connected, change
positioning source to DR or ER mode
294
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
Invalid data
Limitation during fallback to valid PS
Fallback to the next valid
system:
positioning sensor in 10 sec
l
l
l
l
l
Ship symbol related to
positioning system
is unreliable on the Chart
panel;
Coordinate values are
unreliable;
COG – SOG values are
unreliable;
Drift calculations are
unreliable;
RIB/ARPA Target data are
inaccessible
Recommended procedure
l
Use alternative source (PS2) as Primary
positioning system to restore the function;
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer;
l
If alternative EPFS sensor is not connected,
change positioning source to DR or ER
mode.
295
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
Gyrocompass
Sensor fault
Limitation during fallback to valid
Radars changed to Head Up
heading system:
mode.
l
ARPA function is inaccessible;
Only Head Up mode in Radar;
l
DR mode is inaccessible;
l
Corrupted message
Radars changed to Head Up
heading system:
mode.
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Switch to alternative heading source;
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
ARPA function is inaccessible;
l
Call service engineer
Fallback to the next valid
gyrocompass in 10 sec
l
Only Head Up mode in Radar;
l
DR mode is inaccessible;
l
Switch to alternative heading source;
Drift calculations are
unreliable
Limitation during fallback to valid
l
l
Fallback to the next valid
gyrocompass in 10 sec
l
Recommended procedure
Drift calculations are
unreliable
296
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
Invalid data
Limitation during fallback to valid
Radars changed to Head Up
heading system:
mode.
l
ARPA function is inaccessible;
Only Head Up mode in Radar;
l
DR mode is inaccessible;
l
Drift calculations are
unreliable
l
Switch to alternative heading source;
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
Fallback to the next valid
gyrocompass in 10 sec
l
Recommended procedure
297
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
Log
Sensor fault
Limitation during fallback to valid
Fallback to the next valid
speed measuring system:
speed sensor in 10 sec
l
l
l
l
Corrupted message
ARPA function is inaccessible;
speed sensor in 10 sec
l
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Switch to alternative speed source;
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
Drift calculations are
unreliable
Fallback to the next valid
l
Switch to alternative speed source;
DR mode is inaccessible;
speed measuring system:
l
l
Radar Sea stabilization mode
is inaccessible;
Limitation during fallback to valid
l
Recommended procedure
ARPA function is inaccessible;
Radar Sea stabilization mode
is inaccessible;
DR mode is inaccessible;
Drift calculations are
unreliable
298
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
Invalid data
Limitation during fallback to valid
Fallback to the next valid
speed measuring system:
speed sensor in 10 sec
l
l
l
l
Sounder
Sensor fault
Corrupted message
Invalid data
ARPA function is inaccessible;
Recommended procedure
l
Switch to alternative speed source;
l
Check sensor operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Check Sounder operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Check Sounder operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Check Sounder operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
Radar Sea stabilization mode
is inaccessible;
DR mode is inaccessible;
Drift calculations are
unreliable
No sounding data
No sounding data
No sounding data
No
No
No
299
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
Functional limitations due to fault
System’s automatic
response
Anemometer
Sensor fault
No wind data
No
Recommended procedure
l
l
Corrupted message
No wind data
No
l
l
Invalid data
No wind data
No
l
l
Water
Sensor fault
No temperature data
No
l
temperature
sensor
l
Corrupted message
No temperature data
No
l
l
Check Anemometer operation and
connection;
Call service engineer
Check Anemometer operation and
connection;
Call service engineer
Check Anemometer operation and
connection;
Call service engineer
Check temperature sensor operation and
connection;
Call service engineer
Check temperature sensor operation and
connection;
Call service engineer
300
Annex C. MFD Failure Mode and Effect Analyses • FMEA Table
Station/Sensor
Scenario (possible fault)
AIS
Sensor fault
Functional limitations due to fault
l
l
Corrupted message
l
l
NAVTEX
Sensor fault
Corrupted message
No AIS targets data;
System’s automatic
response
No
AIS message and own ship
data exchange is inaccessible
No AIS targets data;
No
AIS message and own ship
data exchange is inaccessible
Navtex messages is not received
Navtex messages is not received
No
No
Recommended procedure
l
Check AIS operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Check AIS operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Check NAVTEX operation and connection;
l
Call service engineer
l
Check NAVTEX operation and connection;
l
l
Switch off Check Supprocessing for Navtex
port;
Call service engineer
Annex D.
Alerts List
302
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
+
+
+
TCS only
+
+
+
TCS only
+
+
+
TCS only
e
Notes
on reset
Early course change
W
150
A
TCS
"+"
30 sec
Actual course change
W
151
A
TCS
"+"
30 sec
Track Control stop
W
153
B
TCS
"+"
30 sec
Position monitor
W
154
A
TCS
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off the alert with ID
1000201 is used
Heading monitor
W
155
A
TCS
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off the alert with ID
1000206 is used
Sensor failure:
W
156
B
TCS
+
+
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off the alert with ID 170
l
Position failure
l
Heading failure
ID 194 for Heading/Log failure are
l
Speed (Log) failure
used
for Position failure and alert with
303
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
Off-Track
A
157
A
TCS
"+" if TCS
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off
switched off the alert with ID 172
by user;
is used
if TCS
switched off
by system
automatically,
alert is
rectified
Course difference
W
158
A
TCS
"+" if TCS
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off
switched off the alert with ID
by user;
1000200 is used
if TCS
switched off
by system
automatically,
alert is
rectified
Low Speed
W
159
B
TCS
TCS only
304
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
on reset
Position failure:
W
170
B
ECDIS
Safety contour
A
171
A
ECDIS
Off-Track
A
172
A
ECDIS
l
POS: no data
l
POS: no input
l
+
POS: COG/SOG no
data
+
Notes
305
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
on reset
Area with special conditions:
l
Traffic separation zone
l
Inshore traffic zone
l
Restricted area
l
Caution area
l
Offshore production
area
l
Areas to be avoided
l
Military practice area
l
Seaplane landing area
l
Submarine transit lane
l
Anchorage area
l
Marine
farm/aquaculture
l
PSSA
l
Anchoring prohibited
l
Cable area
l
Cargo transship area
l
Deep water route
l
Dumping ground
C
173
B
ECDIS
+
Notes
306
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
on reset
l
ESSA
l
Fairway
l
Fishing ground
l
Fishing prohibited
l
Incineration area
l
Precautionary area
l
Rec. traffic lane
l
Spoil ground
l
Traffic crossing
l
Traffic round about
l
Two way traffic route
l
Danger area
l
Exclusive econ. zone
l
Explosives dumping
gnd
l
Fishery zone
l
Harbour limit
l
l
Int. maritime
boundary
Nature reserve
Notes
307
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
l
Prohibited area
l
Quarantine anchorage
l
Swept area
l
Territorial sea base
l
Territorial sea
Approach critical point
W
174
A
ECDIS
Diff. geodetic datum
W
175
B
ECDIS
System malfunction:
W
176
B
MFD
Backup Malfunction
C
177
B
ECDIS
Navigational hazard:
C
178
B
ECDIS
+*
W
190
A
RADA-
+
l
Wxx Keyboard failure
l
Wxx Display failure
l
Navigational hazard
l
MSI Danger
100% Tgt capacity:
l
100% AIS capacity
l
100% ARPA capacity
R
+
Wxx - WS name
+
308
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
CPA/TCPA:
l
A
Wxx Lost Tgt "ID"
RADA-
+
R
W
192
A
RADA-
W
193
B
RADAR
Tgt ID - AIS or ARPA target ID
Wxx - WS name
+
R
Wxx GZ Tgt "ID"
Lost target:
l
191
Wxx CPA/TCPA Tgt
"ID"
Guard zone:
l
A
Tgt ID - AIS or ARPA target ID
Wxx - WS name
+
Tgt ID - AIS or ARPA target ID
Wxx - WS name
309
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
Sensor failure:
l
AIS: no input
l
"Name": Trigger failure
l
l
l
l
l
l
"Name": Heading
failure
"Name": Bearing
failure
"Name": Connection
failure
"Name": Video failure
"Name": Scanner
control
"Name": Video
timeout
l
DLOG: no input
l
DLOG STW: no data
l
GYRO: no data
l
GYRO: no input
l
LOG: no data
l
LOG: no input
W
194
B
RADAR
+
Name - scanner name
310
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
95% TGT capacity:
l
95% AIS capacity
l
95% ARPA capacity
C
100000-
B
0
W
LOG speed lost (Hint: Switch
100010-
RADA-
+
R
A
TCS
2
to Manual Steering!)
"+"
"+" if TCS
2 min
switched off
every 2
by user;
minutes the
if TCS
alert is
switched off
generated
by system
again until it is
acknowl-
auto-
edged
alert is
TCS only
matically,
rectified
End of TCS track
W
1000103
A
TCS
"+"
"+" if TCS
30
switched off
by user;
if TCS
switched off
by system
automatically,
alert is
rectified
+
TCS only
311
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
Wxx: Power Supply Fail
W
100010-
B
TCS
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
4
switched off the alert with ID
1000214 is used
Wxx - WS name
Wxx: Low Battery
W
100010-
B
TCS
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
5
switched off the alert with ID
1000215 is used
Wxx - WS name
Autopilot Power Fail
W
100010-
B
TCS
B
TCS
TCS only
6
Fallback:
l
Position Fallback
l
Heading Fallback
l
Speed Fallback
C
1000107
+
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off the alert with ID
1000204 is used
312
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
AUX Sensor failure:
l
DLOG№: SOG no data
l
DLOG№: STW no data
l
DLOG№: no input
l
GYRO№: no data
l
GYRO№: no input
l
LOG№: no data
l
LOG№: no input
l
POS№: no input
l
POS№: no data
l
C
100010-
B
TCS
+
8
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off the alert with ID
1000207 is used
POS№: COG/SOG no
data
HDG Monitor Impossible
W
100010-
B
TCS
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
9
switched off the alert with ID
1000209 is used
Secondary Position failure:
l
Sec. POS: no data
l
Sec. POS: no input
l
Sec. POS: COG/SOG no
data
C
1000111
B
TCS
+
TCS only. When the TCS mode is
switched off the alert with ID
1000221 is used
313
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
on reset
Course difference
C
100020-
B
ECDIS
B
ECDIS
A
ECDIS
0
Position monitor
C
1000201
Outside anchorage area "№"
W
100020-
"+"
3
Fallback:
l
Position Fallback
l
Heading Fallback
l
Speed Fallback
VDR connection lost
C
100020-
2 min
B
MFD
B
MFD
B
ECDIS
4
C
1000205
Heading Monitor
C
1000206
+
+
Notes
314
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
on reset
AUX Sensor failure:
l
DLOG№: SOG no data
l
DLOG№: STW no data
l
DLOG№: no input
l
GYRO№: no data
l
GYRO№: no input
l
LOG№: no data
l
LOG№: no input
l
POS№: no input
l
POS№: no data
l
100020-
B
MFD
+
A
ECDIS
+
B
ECDIS
B
MFD
7
POS№: COG/SOG no
data
Depth alerts:
l
C
W
8
Sounder depth
HDG Monitor Impossible
100020-
C
1000209
BAM connection lost
C
1000211
Notes
315
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
Off chart
W
100021-
B
ECDIS
B
MFD
2
System degradation:
l
l
l
Network disconnected
Wxx Net1
disconnected
Wxx Net2
disconnected
l
Wxx Disk space low
l
Wxx Disk space full
l
DCU failure (1-1,1-2,21, etc.)
l
DCU Net1 disconnect
l
DCU Net2 disconnect
l
Wxx POS lost
l
Wxx LOG/DLOG lost
l
Wxx GYRO lost
l
Wxx AIStgt lost
l
DCUxxx "Sensor№"
lost
C
1000213
+
Wxx - WS name
316
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
Wxx: Power supply fail
W
100021-
B
MFD
Wxx - WS name
B
MFD
Wxx - WS name
A
ECDIS
B
MFD
B
MFD
B
ECDIS
+
B
ECDIS
+
4
Wxx: Low Battery
W
1000215
Route Alerts:
l
Ahead the schedule
l
Behind the schedule
l
End of track
Check AIS Ship Name
W
100021-
+
+
6
C
1000217
Check AIS Call Sign
C
1000218
Seetrac: MOB
W
1000219
MOB BRG!
W
1000220
317
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
on reset
Secondary Position failure:
l
Sec. POS: no data
l
Sec. POS:no input
l
l
ROT: no data
l
ROT: no input
l
100022-
B
ECDIS
+
B
MFD
+
1
Sec. POS: COG/SOG no
data
Additional Sensors failure:
l
C
TEMPERATURE: no
data
TEMPERATURE: no
input
l
WINDr: no data
l
WIND: no input
l
MAG: no data
l
MAG: no input
l
SOUNDER: no data
l
SOUNDER: no input
l
UTC: no input
l
UTC: no data
C
1000222
Notes
318
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
Notes
on reset
Far Sounder depth
C
100022-
B
ECDIS
B
MFD
3
NMEA_Custom Sensors
C
failure:
l
l
"Param Name": Out of
range
C
WAGO ADC failure:
100022-
MFD
5
WAGO №: No input
l
Param Name - parameter name
4
"Param Name": No
data
WAGO failure:
l
100022-
C
100022-
MFD
Param Name - parameter name
6
"Param Name": No
data
"Param Name": Out of
range
DIS alert:
l
DIS Sounder
l
DIS data ivalid
l
DIS squat curve
l
DIS UKC
W
1000230
A
ECDIS
+
For Draught Information System
mode only
319
Annex D. Alerts List • Alerts List
Name
Type
ID
Ca- Sourc-
Aggre-
Escalation/
Acknowl-
Reset on
Backup
t
gation
timeout
edge
acknowledge
navigator
e
on reset
Test Alarm
A
111111-
A
TEST
+
A
TEST
+
B
ECDIS
1
Test Warning
W
1111112
Backup navigator
A
9999999
+
+
Notes
Multi-Functional Display
Functional Description
Version: 3.00.340
Transas MIP Ltd.
Phone: +46 31 769 56 00.
E-mail: info@transas.com
24/7 Support: +46 771 460 100
WEB: www.transas.com